Lexus LS460 Owner's manual

Lexus LS460 Owner's manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
Before driving
Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column
2
When driving
Driving, stopping and safe-driving information
3
Interior features
Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior
features for a comfortable driving experience
4
Maintenance
and care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-yourself maintenance, and maintenance information
5
When trouble
arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire,
or is involved in an accident
6
Vehicle
specifications
Detailed vehicle information
7
For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners and seat belt instructions for Canadian owners
Index
Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
Index
Before driving
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows................................ 92
Moon roof .......................................... 95
1-1. Key information
Keys ...................................................... 28
1-5. Refueling
1-2. Opening, closing and locking
the doors and trunk
Smart access system with
push-button start .......................... 32
Wireless remote control .............. 45
Doors.................................................... 48
Trunk..................................................... 53
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats.......................................... 60
Power rear seat
(5-seat models)............................. 63
Power rear seat
(4-seat models)............................. 66
Driving position memory
(driver’s seat) ................................. 70
Seat position memory
(front passenger’s seat) ............. 74
Rear seat position memory......... 76
Head restraints................................. 78
Seat belts ........................................... 80
Steering wheel.................................. 87
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror ............................................... 89
Outside rear view mirrors.......... 90
2
Opening the fuel tank cap........... 98
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system........ 101
Alarm.................................................. 103
Theft prevention labels
(U.S.A.)........................................... 105
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture ............. 106
SRS airbags ..................................... 108
Front passenger occupant
classification system.................. 122
Child restraint systems ................ 127
Installing child restraints............. 132
2
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle........................ 144
Engine (ignition) switch .............. 152
Automatic Transmission ............ 156
Turn signal lever............................. 160
Parking brake ................................... 161
Brake Hold....................................... 164
Horn.................................................... 166
3
Interior features
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters ..................... 167
Indicators and warning lights ... 170
Multi-information display........... 174
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers
Headlight switch............................ 178
Fog light switch ............................... 181
Windshield wipers and
washer............................................. 182
Headlight cleaner switch ........... 185
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control ................................ 186
Dynamic radar cruise
control............................................. 189
Intuitive parking assist ................. 199
Electronically modulated
air suspension ............................ 208
Rear view monitor system ......... 210
Driving assist systems.................. 213
Pre-Collision System................... 219
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage..................... 223
Vehicle load limits........................ 226
Winter driving tips ....................... 228
Trailer towing................................. 232
Dinghy towing ............................... 233
3-1. Using the touch screen
Touch screen ................................. 236
Setting the touch screen ........... 239
3-2. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
1
2
Front air conditioning system
(without touch screen)............ 244
3
Front air conditioning system
(touch screen without rear
air conditioning system) ......... 253
Front air conditioning system
(touch screen with rear
4
air conditioning system) ......... 262
Rear air conditioning
system ............................................ 272
Rear window and outside rear
5
view mirror defoggers ............ 279
Windshield wiper de-icer........ 280
3-3. Using the audio system
6
Audio system
(without touch screen)............ 282
Using the radio.............................. 284
Using the CD player.................. 288 7
Playing back MP3 and
WMA discs.................................. 294
Optimal use of the
audio system .............................. 300
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Index
Using the AUX adapter........... 302
Using the steering wheel
audio switches ........................... 303
Audio system
(touch screen without
navigation system) ................... 305
Using the radio............................. 308
Using the CD player.................... 313
Playing MP3 and
WMA discs................................... 321
Using the DVD player............... 328
Playing DVD video/audio......... 331
Playing a video CD...................... 344
DVD player and DVD
video disc information............ 348
Optimal use of the
audio/video system.................. 352
Using the AUX adapter........... 356
Using the rear seat
audio controls............................. 357
Using the steering wheel
audio switches ............................. 361
3-4. Using the rear seat
entertainment system
Rear seat entertainment
system features .......................... 363
Using the radio.............................. 372
Using the front DVD player..... 373
Using the rear DVD player...... 374
Playing an audio
CD/CD text................................ 376
Playing WMA (front DVD
player only)/MP3 discs.......... 377
4
Playing the HDD audio.............. 378
Playing a DVD video/audio .... 379
Playing a video CD...................... 392
DVD player and DVD
video disc information............. 396
Using the video mode ............... 405
Changing other setting.............. 407
3-5. Using the hands-free system
(for cellular phone)
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone).................. 409
Using the Bluetooth®
phone .............................................. 414
Setting the hands-free
system ............................................ 427
3-6. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list............................ 453
• Interior lights ............................... 454
• Personal lights ............................ 454
3-7. Using the storage features
List of storage features............... 456
• Glove box .................................... 459
• Coin holder................................. 460
• Door pockets............................... 461
• Cup holders................................. 462
• Console box................................ 464
• Cool box/auxiliary box........... 466
• Auxiliary boxes........................... 470
3-8. Other interior features
Sun visors......................................... 472
Vanity mirror.................................. 473
Clock................................................. 474
Outside temperature
display ............................................ 476
Ashtrays ........................................... 477
Cigarette lighter........................... 478
Power outlets................................ 480
Heated steering wheel............... 482
Climate control seats/
seat heaters ................................. 484
Armrest ........................................... 488
Rear seat relaxation
system ........................................... 489
Retractable table........................... 491
Rear sunshade............................... 493
Rear door sunshades.................. 496
Trunk storage extension ........... 499
Coat hooks ...................................... 501
Floor mat......................................... 502
Trunk features............................... 503
Garage door opener................. 506
Compass........................................... 512
Lexus Link System ........................ 516
4
Maintenance and care
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior.................. 530
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior.................... 533
1
2
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements ..... 536
General maintenance............... 538 3
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs ....................................... 541
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions.................................. 542
Hood ................................................. 545 5
Positioning a floor jack............... 546
Engine compartment................. 548
Tires ................................................... 565
Tire inflation pressure................. 573 6
Wheels ............................................. 577
Air conditioning filter.................. 579
Electronic key battery............... 582
7
Checking and replacing
fuses............................................... 584
Headlight aim ................................. 601
Light bulbs...................................... 603
5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5
Index
When trouble arises
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers...................... 616
If your vehicle needs to
be towed ........................................ 617
If you think something
is wrong ......................................... 623
Fuel pump shut off system ........ 624
Event data recorder.................... 625
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on
or a warning buzzer
sounds... ........................................ 627
If a warning message is
displayed....................................... 636
If you have a flat tire..................... 639
If the engine will not start .......... 647
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from “P”........................... 649
If the parking brake cannot
be released ................................. 650
If you lose your keys .................... 652
If the electronic key does
not operate properly .............. 653
If the vehicle battery is
discharged ................................... 657
If your vehicle overheats .......... 660
If the vehicle becomes
stuck................................................ 663
6
6
Vehicle specifications
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.)..................... 666
Fuel information............................ 678
Tire information.............................. 681
6-2. Customization
Customizable features............... 692
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ........................... 696
7
For owners
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners.......................... 698
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French).................................... 699
Index
Abbreviation list................................... 702
Alphabetical index .............................. 704
What to do if... ........................................ 714
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
Pictorial index
Windshield wipers P. 182
Parking lights P. 178
Exterior
Moon roof  P. 95
Outside rear view
mirrors P. 90
Hood P. 545
Turn signal lights P. 160
Side marker lights P. 178
Headlights (low beam) P. 178
Fog lights P. 181
Headlights (high beam) P. 178
8
Fuel filler door P. 98
Turn signal lights P. 160
Rear window defogger
Doors P. 48
P. 279
Trunk P. 53
Tires
P. 565
●Rotation
P. 639
●Replacement
●Inflation pressure P. 675
P. 681
●Information
Tail lights P. 178
Side marker lights P. 178
: If equipped
9
Pictorial index
Front interior
Seat belts P. 80
Head restraints P. 78
Door pockets P. 461
SRS driver airbag P. 108
SRS knee airbags P. 108
SRS front passenger airbag P. 108
A
Power outlet P. 480
AUX adapter P. 302
A/V input adapter  P. 405
SRS side airbags P. 108
10
Front seats P. 60
Console box P. 464
A
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror P. 89
Interior light P. 454
Personal lights P. 454
Moon roof switches  P. 95
Garage door opener switches P. 506
Lexus link system  P. 516
Compass  P. 512
SRS curtain shield airbags P. 108
Sun visors P. 472
Vanity mirrors P. 473
Auxiliary boxes P. 470
: If equipped
11
Pictorial index
Front interior
B
Inside lock buttons P. 48
Driving position memory switches P. 70
Seat position memory switches  P. 74
Shoulder anchor control switches
P. 80
Window lock switch P. 92
Door lock switch P. 48
Power window switches P. 92
12
C
Automatic transmission shift lever P. 156
Cigarette lighter P. 478
Ashtray P. 477
Cup holders P. 462
Electronically modulated air suspension
switches  P. 208
Rear seat return switch  P. 63, 66
Rear seat heater switch 
P. 484
Rear climate control seat
switch  P. 484
Rear sunshade switch 
Shift lock override
button P. 649
P. 493
Rear door sunshade switch  P. 496
Front climate control seat switches  P. 484
VSC off switch P. 215
Driving pattern selector switch P. 157
: If equipped
13
Pictorial index
Headlight switch P. 178
Turn signal lever P. 160
Fog light switch P. 181
Instrument panel
Gauges and meters P. 167
Multi-information display P. 174
Windshield wiper and washer switch P. 182
Engine (ignition) switch P. 152
Horn
P. 166
Clock
●Without Navigation system P. 474
●With Navigation system *1
Emergency flasher switch P. 616
Trunk opener main
switch P. 54
Floor mat
P. 502
Hood release
lever P. 545
Glove box P. 459
Volume adjust knob P. 36
Tire pressure warning reset switch P. 565
Parking brake switches P. 161
Trunk opener P. 53
Fuel filler door opener P. 98
14
A
Without touch screen
Air conditioning
system P. 244
Rear window and
outside rear view
mirror defoggers
Audio system
P. 282
P. 279
With touch screen (without navigation system)
Touch screen
Rear window and
outside rear view
mirror defoggers
P. 236
Air conditioning
system P. 253, 262
P. 279
Audio system
P. 305
With touch screen (with navigation system)
Touch screen *1
Navigation
system *1
Rear window and
outside rear view
mirror defoggers
P. 279
Air conditioning
system P. 253, 262
Audio system *1
: If equipped
*1: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
15
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
B
Without touch screen
Audio remote control switches P. 361
“DISP” switch P. 174
“RESET” switch
P. 174
Cruise control
switch P. 186, 189
Distance switch  P. 189
Brake hold switch P. 164
With touch screen
Audio remote control switches P. 361
*2
Telephone switch P. 409
*2
“DISP” switch
P. 174
“RESET” switch
P. 174
Cruise control
switch P. 186, 189
Brake hold switch P. 164
Talk switch P. 254, 263, 420
16
*2
Distance switch  P. 189
C
Outside rear view mirror switches P. 90
Instrument panel light control buttons P. 168
Headlight cleaner switch  P. 185
Tilt and telescopic steering
control switch P. 87
Heated steering wheel switch  P. 482
Intuitive parking assist switch  P. 199
“AFS OFF” switch P. 179
: If equipped
*2: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
17
Pictorial index
Auxiliary boxes P. 470
Cool box/
auxiliary box  P. 466
Trunk storage extension 
P. 499
Head restraints P. 78
Rear interior
(5-seat models)
Seat position memory
switches  P. 76
Power window
switches P. 92
SRS side airbags 
P. 108
A
Seat belts P. 80
Cup holders P. 462
Cigarette lighter P. 478
18
A
Interior light P. 454
Personal lights P. 454
SRS curtain shield
airbags P. 108
B
Rear seat entertainment
system  P. 363
Vanity mirrors P. 473
Coat hooks P. 501
Rear audio
switches  P. 357
Power seat
switches  P. 63
Seat heater
switches  P. 484
Rear air conditioning
switches  P. 272
Rear climate control
seat switches 
P. 484
Rear door sunshade
switches  P. 496
Rear sunshade switch 
P. 493
: If equipped
19
Pictorial index
DVD player  P. 374
Headphone jacks P. 367
Rear interior
(4-seat models)
Seat position memory
switches P. 76
Power window
switches P. 92
SRS side airbags
Head restraints
P. 78
P. 108
A
Seat belts P. 80
Power outlet (115 VAC)  P. 480
Cup holders P. 462
SRS seat cushion airbag P. 108
Auxiliary boxes P. 470
20
A
Interior light P. 454
Personal lights P. 454
SRS curtain shield
airbags P. 108
Rear seat entertainment system P. 363
Vanity mirrors P. 473
Coat hooks P. 501
: If equipped
21
Pictorial index
Rear interior
(4-seat models)
B
A/V input adapter P. 405
Cigarette lighters  P. 478
Power outlet  P. 480
Rear seat entertainment system
controller P. 363
Rear seat relaxation system
controller P. 489
Cool box/auxiliary box P. 466
22
C
Retractable table lock release lever P. 491
Rear sunshade switch P. 493
Rear door sunshade switches P. 496
Rear air conditioning
switches P. 272
Rear air conditioning
switches P. 272
Rear audio switches
P. 357
Rear climate control
seat switches
P. 484
Power seat switches P. 66
: If equipped
23
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed
on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the
right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustration may differ from
your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming
from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation
leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are
currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant
these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement,
or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your
Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification
with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect
electronic systems such as the multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport
fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti-lock brake system, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for
precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation.
24
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive
chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left
as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of
the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified
service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may
include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
CAUTION
■ General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol
and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination,
which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers
or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts
the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can
result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or
others.
■ General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or
use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is
also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the cigarette
lighter, the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat
build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
25
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
CAUTION
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause injury to people. You
are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury
to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to
avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment.
Symbols used in illustrations
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”,
“Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen.”
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.)
used to operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g.
a lid opens).
26
Before driving
1-1. Key information
Keys.............................................. 28
1-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors and
trunk
Smart access system with
push-button start................... 32
Wireless remote control......... 45
1
Steering wheel .......................... 87
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror......................................... 89
Outside rear view mirrors...... 90
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows.......................... 92
Moon roof ................................... 95
Doors ........................................... 48
Trunk ............................................. 53
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap ..... 98
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Front seats................................... 60
Engine immobilizer
system....................................... 101
Power rear seat
(5-seat models)....................... 63
Alarm.......................................... 103
Power rear seat
(4-seat models)....................... 66
Driving position memory
(driver’s seat)........................... 70
Seat position memory
(front passenger’s seat) ........ 74
Rear seat position
memory ..................................... 76
Head restraints .......................... 78
Seat belts .................................... 80
Theft prevention labels
(U.S.A.).................................... 105
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture ....... 106
SRS airbags .............................. 108
Front passenger occupant
classification system............ 122
Child restraint systems .......... 127
Installing child restraints....... 132
27
1-1. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart access
system with push-button start
(P. 32)
• Operating the wireless
remote control function
(P. 45)
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
■ Card key (if equipped)
Electronic key
Operating the smart access system with push-button start
(P. 32)
Mechanical key
The card key comes with an information card that includes instructions
for use. Lexus recommends that you carry the information card with
the card key.
28
1-1. Key information
Using the mechanical key
Take out the mechanical key.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery depletes or the entry
function does not operate properly,
you will need the mechanical key.
(P. 653)
■ Card key
● The mechanical key that is stored inside the card key should be used only if a
problem arises, such as when the key does not operate properly.
● If it is difficult to take out the mechanical key, push down the lock release button
using a pen tip etc. If it is difficult to pull it out, use a coin etc.
● To store the mechanical key in the card
key, insert it inside while pressing the
lock release button.
29
1
Before driving
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the key
only has grooves on one side. If the
key cannot be inserted in a lock
cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt
to insert it.
1-1. Key information
● If the battery cover is not installed and
the battery falls out or if the battery was
removed because the key got wet, reinstall the battery with the positive terminal facing the Lexus emblem.
● The card key is not waterproof.
■ When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant
Turn the trunk opener main switch off and lock the glove box and the trunk storage
extension as circumstances demand. (P. 54, 459, 499)
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the
electronic key only.
■ Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that
a mechanical key is lost, a new key can be made at your Lexus dealer using the key
number plate. (P. 652)
■ When riding in an aircraft
When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any
buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an
electronic key in your bag etc, ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed
accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves
that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
30
1-1. Key information
NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
Observe the following.
1
● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to
such materials.
● Do not disassemble the electronic keys.
● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs,
audio systems, glass top ranges, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-frequency therapy equipment.
■ Precautions for handling the card keys
● Do not apply excess force when inserting the mechanical key to the card key.
Doing so may damage the card key.
● If the battery or card key terminals get wet, the battery may corrode.
If the key is dropped into water, or if drinking water etc. is spilled on the key,
immediately remove the battery cover and wipe the battery and terminals. (To
remove the battery cover, lightly grasp it and pull.) If the battery is corroded, have
your Lexus dealer replace the battery.
● Do not crush the battery cover or use a screwdriver to remove the battery cover.
Forcibly removing the battery cover may bend or damage the key.
● If the battery cover is frequently removed, the battery cover may become loose.
● When installing the battery, make sure to check the direction of the battery.
Installing the battery in the wrong direction may cause the battery to deplete rapidly.
● The surface of the card key may be damaged, or its coating may peel off in the
following situations.
• The card key is carried together with hard objects, such as coins or keys.
• The card key is scraped with a sharp object, such as a tip of mechanical pencil.
• The surface of the card key is wiped with thinners or benzene.
31
Before driving
● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for a long period of time.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Smart access system with push-button start
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key (including the card key) on your person, for example in your
pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 33)
Opens the trunk (P. 33)
Starts and stops the engine (P. 152)
32
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Unlocking and locking the doors
Grip the handle to unlock the
door.
The door cannot be unlocked for 3
seconds after the door is locked.
Press the lock button to lock the
door.
Pressing and holding the button
closes the windows.
The moon roof will also close. (if
equipped)
Opening the trunk
Press the button.
If the vehicle is equipped with a
power trunk opener and closer, the
trunk lid automatically opens fully.
33
1
Before driving
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Antenna location and effective range
■ Antenna location
Antennas outside cabin
Antennas inside cabin
Antenna inside trunk
Antenna outside trunk
34
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
When locking or unlocking
the doors
When unlocking the trunk
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (70 cm) of
the trunk release button.
When starting the engine
or changing “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
modes
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
inside the vehicle.
35
1
Before driving
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (70 cm) of
an outside door handle. (Only
the doors detecting the key
can be operated.)
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors
have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.
Windows and moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon
roof are operating.
■ Door lock buzzer
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer
sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle
once more.
■ Adjusting the volume of the buzzer
The operation signal buzzer and door lock buzzer can be set to the desired volume.
Increases the volume.
Decreases the volume.
The buzzer can be turned off by turning the
knob fully clockwise.
36
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Conditions affecting operation
The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle
may be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start, wireless remote control and engine immobilizer system from operating properly:
(Ways of coping: P. 653)
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display,
airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wire-
less communication devices
● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metal-
lic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity
● When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby
● When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit
radio waves
• Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear
window
37
Before driving
● When the electronic key battery is depleted
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote
control.
STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
STEP 2 When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and
hold
holding
,
, or
on the key.
for about 5 seconds while pressing and
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When
changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds,
and repeat step 2.)
Multi-information
display
Unlocking doors
Beep
Hold the driver’s door handle
to unlock only the driver’s
Exterior: Beeps 3 times
door.
Interior: Rings once
Hold a passenger’s door handle to unlock all the doors.
Hold the door handle to
unlock the front and rear
doors on your side.
Exterior: Beeps 4 times
Interior: Rings once
Hold the door handle to
unlock the door.
Exterior: Beeps once
Interior: Rings once
Hold a door handle to unlock Exterior: Beeps twice
all doors.
Interior: Rings once
38
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
STEP 3 Unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open one of the
doors.
If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after
is pressed, the
doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.
In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm.
(P. 103)
In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to prevent the
vehicle battery from discharging and electronic key battery from depleting.
● When the entry function has not been used for a month or more
● When the electronic key has been left within approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the
vehicle for 10 minutes or more
The system will resume operation when
● The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch when carrying the elec-
tronic key on your person.
● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control function.
(P. 45)
● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (P. 653)
■ Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The card key battery life is about a year
and a half.)
● The battery becomes depleted even if the electronic key is not used because
the key always transmits radio waves. If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does not operate, or the detection area
becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. ( P. 582)
● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of
the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field.
•
•
•
•
•
•
TVs
Personal computers
Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
Glass top ranges
Table lamps
39
Before driving
■ Battery-saving function
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the
electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside
of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may
not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may
go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not function.)
■ Note for the entry function
● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the
system may not operate properly in the following cases:
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the
ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the
rear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in
the glove box when the engine is started or “ENGINE START STOP” switch
modes are changed.
● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be
locked or unlocked by anyone.
● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the
engine if the electronic key is near the window.
● The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle,
such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is within the effective
range. (The door will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if
the doors are not opened and closed.)
● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key
is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the
entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)
● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the
doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original
position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.
■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of
the vehicle.
40
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the anti-theft system automatically locks the vehicle again.
■ Alarms and warning indicators
Alarm
Exterior alarm
sounds once for 2
seconds.
Situation
Correction procedure
An attempt was made to lock
the doors using the entry
function while the electronic
key was still inside the passenger compartment.
Retrieve the electronic
key from the passenger
compartment and lock
the doors again.
The trunk was closed with the Retrieve the electronic
electronic key inside and all key from the trunk and
doors were locked.
close the trunk lid.
An attempt was made to exit
the vehicle and lock the
Exterior alarm
doors while carrying the
sounds once for 60
electronic key without first
seconds.
turning the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF.
Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and lock the doors
again.
Exterior alarm
An attempt was made to lock Close all of the doors
sounds once for 10 the vehicle while a door was and lock the doors
seconds.
open.
again.
41
1
Before driving
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warnings displayed on the
multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and unforeseeable
accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Perform the appropriate correction
procedure described in the following table:
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Alarm
Situation
The “ENGINE START
STOP” switch was turned to
ACCESSORY mode while
the driver’s door was open
(or the driver’s door was
Interior alarm pings opened while the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch was in
continuously.
ACCESSORY mode).
42
Correction procedure
Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and close the
driver’s door.
The “ENGINE START
STOP” switch was turned
OFF while the driver’s door
was open.
Close the driver’s door.
Interior alarm
sounds continuously. *1
When the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON or ACCESSORY
mode, an attempt was made
to open the door and exit the
vehicle, and the shift lever
was not in “P”.
Shift the shift lever to “P”
and turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF.
Interior and exterior alarms sound
continuously. *1
When the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON or ACCESSORY
mode, the driver's door was
closed after the key was carried outside the vehicle, and
the shift lever was not in “P”.
Shift the shift lever to
“P”, turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and close the
driver's door again.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Alarm
Situation
Correction procedure
The electronic key has a low
battery.
Replace the electronic
key battery.
The driver's door was closed
after the key was carried outside the vehicle, and the
Interior alarm pings “ENGINE START STOP”
once and exterior switch was not turned OFF.
alarm sounds 3
An occupant carried the
times. *1
electronic key outside the
vehicle and closed the door
while the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch was not OFF.
Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and close the
driver's door again.
Bring the electronic key
back into the vehicle.
*1
: A warning message will be shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster.
*2: If the engine does not start when the electronic key is inside the vehicle, the elec-
tronic key battery may be depleted or there may be difficulties receiving the signal from the key. (P. 39)
■ If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: Use the mechanical key.
(P. 653)
● Starting the engine: P. 655
■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 582
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. smart access system with push-button start) can be deactivated.
(Customizable features P. 692)
43
1
Before driving
Interior alarm pings An attempt was made to start
the engine without the elec- Start the engine with the
once. *1
tronic key being present, or electronic key present.
*2
the electronic key was not
functioning normally.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF-4
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away
from the smart access system antennas. (P. 37) The radio waves may affect the
operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask
your Lexus dealer for details, such as frequency of radio waves and timing of
emitting the radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable
the entry function.
● User of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and
implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical
devices.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details for disabling the entry function.
44
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Wireless remote control
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle and
the trunk from outside the vehicle.
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
1
Before driving
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Opens the windows (press
and hold)
The moon roof will also open. (if
equipped)
Unlocks the trunk
(press and hold)
Vehicles equipped with a
power trunk opener and
closer: Opens the trunk
(press and hold)
Sounds alarm
(press and hold) (P. 103)
■ Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors
have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.
Windows and moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon
roof are opening.
■ Door lock buzzer
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer
sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle
once more.
45
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Adjusting the volume of the buzzer
The operation signal buzzer and door lock buzzer can be set to the desired volume.
(P. 36)
■ Alarm
Using the wireless remote control to lock the door will set the alarm system.
(P. 103)
■ Electronic key battery depletion
P. 39
■ Security feature
P. 41
■ If the wireless remote control does not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: Use the mechanical key.
(P. 653)
● Starting the engine: P. 655
■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 582
■ Conditions affecting operation
P. 37
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. trunk unlocking function) can be changed. (Customizable features
P. 692)
46
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Certification for wireless remote control
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQ14AAB
FCC ID: HYQ14ABB
FCC ID: HYQ13BZL
FCC ID: HYQ14ABK
FCC ID: HYQ14ABS
FCC ID: HYQ13BZT
1
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
47
Before driving
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless
remote control or door lock switch.
■ Entry function
P. 33
■ Wireless remote control
P. 45
■ Door lock switch
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
■ Inside lock button
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handle even
if the lock buttons are in the lock
position.
48
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left
inside the vehicle.
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the locks
are set.
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear
doors.
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or cancelled:
Function
Operation
Shift position linked door
locking function
Shifting the shift lever out of “P” locks all doors.
Shift position linked door
unlocking function
Shifting the shift lever to “P” unlocks all doors.
Speed linked door locking
function
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
Driver's door linked door
unlocking function
All doors are unlocked when the driver's door is
opened within 10 seconds after turning the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
49
Before driving
The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Setting and canceling the functions
To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Close all the doors and switch the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch to IGNITION ON mode. (Perform the step 2 within 20
seconds.)
Shift the shift lever to “P” or “N”,
and press and hold the driver's
door lock switch (
or
)
for approximately 5 seconds and
then release.
The shift lever and switch positions
corresponding to the desired function to be set are shown as follows.
Use the same procedure to cancel
the function.
Function
Shift position linked door locking
function
Shift position linked door unlocking function
Shift lever position
Driver’s door lock
switch position
P
Speed linked door locking function
Driver's door linked door unlocking
function
N
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are locked
and then unlocked.
50
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Door closer (if equipped)
In the event that a door is left slightly open, the door closer will automatically close it
to the fully closed position.
1
● The door closer will operate regardless of “ENGINE START STOP” switch
mode.
Before driving
● The door closer will not function if the door has been closed while pulling the
inside or outside door handle.
● The door can be opened by pulling the inside or outside door handle, even
when the door closer is operating (except when the lock button is in the lock
position or the child-protector lock is set).
● The motor sound may be heard for several seconds after the door closer closes
the door. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Impact detection door lock release system
In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.
Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system
may not operate.
■ Using the mechanical key
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 653)
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 692)
51
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Always use a seat belt.
● Always lock all doors.
● Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehicle and it
may result in serious injury or death.
Be especially careful for the front doors, the doors may be opened even if the
inside lock buttons are in locked position.
● Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear seat.
■ Door closer
In the event that a door is left slightly open, the door closer will automatically close it
to the fully closed position.
If the child-protector lock is set, the door closer will not stop during operation even
if an attempt is made to open the door from inside the vehicle. Be careful not to
catch fingers or anything else in the door. Failure to do so may result in serious
injury.
NOTICE
■ To prevent door closer malfunction (vehicles with door closer)
Do not frequently repeat opening and closing of doors, or apply excessive force to
a door while the door closer is operating.
52
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Trunk
The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or wireless
remote control.
■ Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle
Press the opener switch.
1
Before driving
If the vehicle is equipped with a
power trunk opener and closer,
the trunk lid automatically opens
fully.
■ Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle
Entry function
P. 33
Wireless remote control
P. 45
Trunk closer switch (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
Pressing the switch closes the
trunk lid automatically. (A buzzer
sounds.)
Pressing the switch while the trunk
lid is closing opens the trunk lid
again.
53
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Canceling the trunk opener feature
Turn the main switch in the glove
box off to disable the trunk opener.
On
Off
The trunk lid cannot be opened
even with the wireless remote control or the entry function.
■ Trunk handle
Use the trunk handle when closing the trunk.
■ Trunk easy closer
In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly open, the trunk easy closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position.
■ Function to prevent the trunk being locked with the electronic key inside (when
all the doors are locked)
Closing the trunk lid with the electronic key left inside the trunk will sound an alarm.
In this case, the trunk lid can be opened by pressing the button on the trunk lid.
■ Overload protection function (vehicles with a power trunk opener and closer
only)
The trunk lid will not operate when excessive load is present on the top of the trunk
lid.
54
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Fall-down protection function (vehicles with a power trunk opener and closer
only)
While the trunk lid is opening automatically, applying excessive force to it will stop
the opening operation to prevent the trunk lid from rapidly falling down.
1
■ Jam protection function (vehicles with a power trunk opener and closer only)
■ Internal trunk release lever
The trunk lid can be opened by pulling down
on the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the
inside of trunk lid.
The lever will continue to glow for some time
after the trunk lid is closed.
■ Using the mechanical key
The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (P. 653)
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Setting of power trunk opener and closer function can be deactivated.
(Customizable features P. 692)
55
Before driving
While the trunk lid is closing automatically, the trunk lid will stop closing and open if
something gets caught.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
● Keep the trunk lid closed while driving.
If the trunk lid is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or luggage in
the trunk may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a serious
health hazard. Make sure to close the trunk lid before driving.
● Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk
lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, causing an accident.
● Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they
are susceptible to death or serious injury.
■ When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not allow children to enter the trunk.
If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could overheat or suffocate.
● Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.
Doing so may cause the trunk lid to operate unexpectedly, or cause the child’s
hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.
56
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ Using the trunk
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury.
1
● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening
● When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the sur-
rounding area is safe.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the
trunk is about to open or close.
● Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may
move abruptly in strong wind.
● The trunk lid may fall if it is not opened
fully. It is more difficult to open or close
the trunk lid on an incline than on a level
surface, so beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly opening or closing by itself.
Make sure that the trunk lid is fully open
and secure before using the trunk.
● When closing the trunk lid, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc. from
being caught.
● When closing the trunk lid, make sure to
press it lightly on its outer surface. If the
trunk handle is used to fully close the
trunk lid, it may result in hands or arms
being caught.
● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid.
Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to fall closed again after
it is opened.
57
Before driving
it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to fall closed again after it is opened.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ Trunk easy closer
In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly
open, the trunk easy closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position. It
takes several seconds before the trunk
easy closer begins to operate. Be careful
not to catch fingers or anything else in the
trunk lid, as this may cause bone fractures
or other serious injuries.
■ Power trunk opener and closer
Observe the following precautions when operating the power trunk opener and
closer.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
● Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or
anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the
trunk is about to open or close.
● If the trunk closer switch is pressed while the trunk lid is opening during automatic
operation, the trunk lid stops opening. Take extra care when on an incline, as the
trunk lid may open or close suddenly.
● On an incline, the trunk lid may fall after it opens automatically. Make sure the
trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk.
● In the following situations, the power trunk opener and closer may detect an
abnormality and automatic operation may be stopped. In this case, the trunk lid
has to be operated manually. Take extra care in this situation, as the stopped trunk
lid may suddenly fall, causing an accident.
• When the trunk lid contacts an obstacle
• When the battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode or the engine is
started during automatic operation
● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid. The
power trunk opener and closer may not operate, causing itself to malfunction, or
the trunk lid may fall closed again after it is opened.
58
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ Jam protection function
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
1
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the trunk lid fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the
trunk lid.
● The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the object
that is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.
NOTICE
■ To prevent trunk easy closer malfunction
Do not apply force to the trunk lid while the trunk easy closer is operating.
■ To prevent damage to the power trunk opener and closer
● Make sure that there is no luggage or snow on the trunk lid before operating the
power trunk opener and closer. In addition, make sure that there is no ice
between the trunk lid and frame that would prevent movement of the trunk lid.
Operating the power trunk opener and closer when excessive load is present on
the trunk lid may cause a malfunction.
● Do not apply excessive force to the trunk lid while the power trunk opener and
closer is operating.
59
Before driving
tion.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
Passenger’s seat
Driver’s seat
Seat position switch
The height of the driver's head restraint is automatically adjusted simultaneously with the seat position adjustment operation.
Seatback angle switch
Head restraint height adjustment switch (P. 78)
Seat cushion (front) angle switch
Vertical height adjustment switch
Lumbar support switch
Driver’s seat: 4 way
Front passenger’s seat: 2 way
Seat cushion length adjustment switch
60
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat operation switches on the side of the front passenger's seat
● Seatback angle switch
Forward
Backward
● Seat position switch
Forward
Backward
1
Before driving
Operating the front passenger’s seat from the rear seat (4-seat models)
Moves the front passenger’s
seat forward
The signal beeps when seat operation stops at the forward limit.
Moves the front passenger’s
seat backward
The seatback will return to the neutral position.
■ Operating the front passenger’s seat from the rear seat (4-seat models)
The front passenger’s seat can be operated when the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is in IGNITION ON mode. However, in the following situations, the front
passenger’s seat does not move even when the switch is operated.
● The front passenger’s seat belt is in use.
● The front passenger’s door is open. (The front seat will not move forward.)
■ Seat cushion automatic length adjustment (driver’s seat only)
If the front of the cushion gets too close to the area around the instrument panel
when the seat position is being adjusted, the seat cushion will automatically retract.
61
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Seat operation automatic stop function (4-seat models)
The seat operation will stop if a front seat is going to contact the retractable table.
(A warning message will be shown on the multi-information display.)
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the
seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt,
increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move
and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
■ Operating the front passenger's seat from the driver's seat or rear seat
Do not operate the front passenger's seat when a passenger is seated in it. In addition, do not let anyone sit down in the front passenger's seat while the seat is being
operated. The front passenger may catch their legs between the instrument panel
and seat, resulting in injury.
NOTICE
■ Operating the front passenger's seat from the driver’s seat or rear seat
Before operating the front passenger's seat, make sure that there is no luggage or
any other objects on the seat or in the footwell that could prevent its operation.
Failure to do so may result in excess force being applied, causing damage to the
seat and/or the luggage.
62
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Power rear seat (5-seat models)
1
Before driving
Seat selection switch
The indicator light for the seat that can be operated comes on.
Seat position adjustment switch
Seatback upper angle adjustment switch
Head restraint height adjustment switch (P. 78)
The seat return function linked to the door opening operation allows
the seat to automatically return to the neutral position for easier access
to and from the vehicle.
: If equipped
63
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Returning the rear seat from the front seats
The seat will return to the neutral
position while the button is pressed
and held.
■ Cancelling the seat return function
Pressing the “C” button will disable the seat
return function. When disabled, the seat will
not return when the door is opened.
The indicator light comes on when the seat
return function is disabled.
Pressing the button again will enable the seat
return function.
Performing either of the following cancels the seat returning operation:
• Press the “SET”, “M” or “C” button.
• Press any of the seat adjustment switches.
■ Operating the seat return function after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
OFF
The seat will automatically return to the neutral position if the door is opened within
45 seconds after the engine is turned off.
64
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment
■ When adjusting the seat position
Keep sufficient footwell space to prevent your feet from being caught by the front
seat.
■ When returning the rear seats to the neutral position
Wait until passengers have gotten off the rear seat before operating the switch to
avoid injuring the passengers.
65
1
Before driving
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the
seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt,
increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move
and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Power rear seat (4-seat models)
The right-hand rear seat is a relaxation seat, which is equipped with a
seatback angle adjustment function and an ottoman.
Seat selection switch
The indicator light for the seat that can be operated comes on.
Seat position adjustment switch
Seatback upper angle adjustment switch
Head restraint height adjustment switch (P. 78)
Seatback angle adjustment switch
Ottoman angle adjustment switch
Front passenger’s seat control switch (P. 60)
Relaxation mode switch
The seat return function linked to the door opening operation allows
the seat to automatically return to the neutral position for easier access
to and from the vehicle.
66
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Returning the rear seat from the front seats
The seat will return to the neutral
position while the button is pressed
and held.
1
Before driving
Relaxation mode operation
Relaxation mode can be entered by operating a switch. The front passenger seat will move forward and then the seatback of the relaxation seat
will recline and the ottoman will simultaneously rise.
Enters relaxation mode
Returns to the neutral position.
The signal beeps when either
operation is completed.
■ Relaxation mode
Relaxation mode can be entered when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
IGNITION ON mode. However, in the following situations, relaxation mode cannot be entered even when the switch is operated:
● The front passenger’s seat belt is in use.
● The front passenger’s door is open. (The front seat will not move forward.)
67
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Canceling the seat return function
Pressing the “C” button will disable the seat
return function. When disabled, the seat will
not return when the door is opened.
The indicator light comes on when the seat
return function is disabled.
Pressing the button again will enable the seat
return function.
Performing either of the following cancels the seat returning operation:
• Press the “SET”, “M” or “C” button.
• Press any of the seat adjustment switches.
■ Operation after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF
● The rear seat can be returned to the neutral position as long as the relaxation
mode switch is operated within 45 seconds after the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is turned OFF.
● The seat return function is available for 45 seconds after the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned OFF.
■ Seat operation automatic stop function
If the rear seat and front passenger seat are going to come in contact with each
other, the signal will beep and seat operation will stop.
68
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment
■ When adjusting the seat position and ottoman angle
Keep sufficient footwell space to prevent your feet from being caught by the front
seat.
■ When returning the rear seats to the neutral position
Wait until passengers have gotten off the rear seat before operating the switch to
avoid injuring the passengers.
■ Using the ottoman
● Do not sit on the ottoman.
If someone sits on the ottoman, the seat belt cannot be fitted properly, and they
may be thrown from the seat resulting in death or serious injury in the event of an
accident or sudden braking.
● When getting in or out of the vehicle, retract the ottoman. If the ottoman is not
retracted, it may cause a fall, resulting in injury.
NOTICE
■ To prevent an ottoman malfunction
● Do not place any objects in the rear seat footwell that could prevent the opera-
tion of the ottoman.
● Do not place heavy luggage on the ottoman.
69
1
Before driving
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the
seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt,
increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move
and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Driving position memory (driver’s seat)
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat and steering wheel, angle of the outside rear view mirrors, and height of seat belt)
can be memorized and recalled with the touch of a button. It is also possible
to set this function to activate automatically when the doors are unlocked.
Three different driving positions can be entered into memory.
■ Entering a position to memory
STEP 1 Switch to IGNITION ON mode.
STEP 2 Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, outside rear view mirrors and seat belt height to the desired positions.
Press the “SET” button, then
STEP 3
within 3 seconds press button
“1”, “2” or “3” until the signal
beeps.
If the selected button has
already been preset, the previously recorded position will be
overwritten.
■ Recalling the memorized position
Check that the shift lever is set in “P”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
70
Switch to IGNITION ON mode.
Press button “1”, “2” or “3” to
recall the memorized position.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation
Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before performing
the following.
The driving position is recalled
when the driver's door is unlocked
using the entry function or wireless
remote control and the driver’s
door is opened.
STEP 3
Open one of the doors.
If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after
is pressed, the
doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.
In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm.
(P. 103)
71
1
Before driving
Using the wireless remote control
STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the
driver's door.
While pressing the desired button
STEP 2
(“1”, “2” or “3”), push
on the
wireless remote control until the
signal beeps.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Using the door lock switch
Carry only one of the keys (including the card key) to which you want
to link the driving position. If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be linked properly.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the
driver's door.
While pressing the desired button
(“1”, “2” or “3”), press the lock or
unlock side on the door lock
switch (either the driver or passenger side) until the signal beeps.
The driving position is recalled
when the driver's door is unlocked
using the entry function or wireless
remote control and the driver's
door is opened.
■ Canceling the linked door unlock operation
STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the driver's door.
STEP 2 Using the wireless remote control: While pushing the “SET” button, press
on the wireless remote control until the signal beeps.
Using the door lock switch: While pressing the “SET” button, press the
lock or unlock side on the door lock switch until the signal beeps.
■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF
Memorized positions (except the steering wheel position) can be activated up to
180 seconds after the driver’s door is opened and another 60 seconds after it is
closed again, even after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned OFF.
■ Stopping memorized position operation part-way through
Perform any of the following operations:
● Press the “SET” button.
● Press button “1”, “2” or “3”.
● Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall).
72
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Seat operation automatic stop function (4-seat models)
The seat operation will stop if a front seat is going to contact the retractable table.
(A warning message will be shown on the multi-information display.)
1
CAUTION
Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger
or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.
73
Before driving
■ Seat adjustment caution
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat position memory (front passenger’s seat)
Your preferred front passenger seat position and height of seat belt can be
memorized and recalled with the touch of a button.
Three different seat positions can be entered into memory.
■ Entering a position to memory
STEP 1 Switch to IGNITION ON mode.
STEP 2 Adjust the front passenger seat and seat belt height to the
desired position.
Press the “SET” button, then
STEP 3
within 3 seconds press button
“1”, “2” or “3” until the signal
beeps.
If the selected button has
already been preset, the previously recorded position will be
overwritten.
■ Recalling the memorized position
Check that the shift lever is set in “P”.
Press button “1”, “2” or “3” to
recall the memorized position.
: If equipped
74
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Operating the seat position memory after turning the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch OFF
Memorized position can be activated up to 180 seconds after the front passenger
door is opened, even after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
1
■ Stopping memorized position operation part-way through
Before driving
Perform any of the following operations.
● Press the “SET” button.
● Press button “1”, “2” or “3”.
● Adjust the seat position using the switches.
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger.
75
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Rear seat position memory
The rear seat position can be memorized and recalled with the touch of a
button.
■ Entering a position to memory
STEP 1 Switch to IGNITION ON mode.
STEP 2 Adjust the rear seat to the desired position.
Press the “SET” button until the
STEP 3
signal beeps.
If the preset is being used, the
previously recorded seat position will be overwritten.
■ Recalling the memorized position
Press the “M” button until the
signal beeps.
Relaxation seat: The memorized position will only be
recalled if the ottoman is in a
position higher than the memorized position. It will not move in
an upward direction.
: If equipped
76
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Seat return function linked to the door opening operation
When the door is opened, the rear seat will automatically return to the neutral position. This function is available for 45 seconds after the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is turned OFF.
1
■ Operating the rear seat position memory after turning the engine OFF
■ Canceling the seat position recall or return function
Pressing the “C” button will disable the seat
position recall or seat return function.
The indicator light comes on when the function is disabled.
Pressing the button again will enable the seat
position recall or seat return function.
Performing either of the following cancels the seat returning operation:
• Press the “SET”, “M” or “C” button.
• Press any of the seat adjustment switches.
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment so that the rear passengers do not strike the front
seats.
77
Before driving
The seat will automatically return to the neutral position as long as the door is
opened within 45 seconds after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned OFF.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
■ Front seats
Vertical adjustment
P. 60
Horizontal adjustment
■ Outside rear seats
Power type
Vertical adjustment
5-seat models: P. 63
4-seat models: P. 66
Horizontal adjustment
Manual type
Vertical adjustment
Push and hold the lock release
button when lowering.
Horizontal adjustment
78
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Rear center seat (5-seat models)
To use
To fold
1
Before driving
■ Removing and installing the head restraints
For removal and installation of the head restraint, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints (except rear center seat)
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
CAUTION
■ Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so
may result in death or serious injury.
● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
79
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the
vehicle.
■ Correct use of the seat belts
● Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not come
into contact with the neck or
slide off the shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips.
● Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight and
well back in the seat.
● Do not twist the seat belt.
■ Fastening and releasing the seat belt
Fastening the belt
Push the tab into the buckle until
a clicking sound is heard.
Releasing the belt
Release button
80
Press the release button.
If the seat belt cannot be pulled
out of the retractor, firmly pull
the belt and release it.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)
Up
Down
1
Before driving
Seat belt comfort guide (outside rear seats)
If the shoulder belt sits close to a
person’s neck, slide the seat belt
comfort guide forward.
Seat belt pretensioners (front and outside rear seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal collision.
The pretensioner may not activate
in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a side impact or a rear
impact.
81
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-collision system)
If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the precollision system will retract the seat belt, thus enhancing the effectiveness
of the seat belt pretensioner in a crash.
The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or loses control of the vehicle. (P. 219)
■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if
you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that
you can move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even
slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is
used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully
retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 132)
■ Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt
in the proper way. (P. 80)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in
the same manner as other occupants. Extend
the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest.
Avoid belt contact over the round part of the
abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only
the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could
suffer death or serious injury as a result of
sudden braking or a collision.
82
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.
■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes
● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt,
follow the instructions on P. 80 regarding seat belt usage.
■ Automatic adjustment of the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats on 4-
seat models)
A desired seat belt shoulder anchor height can be entered to memory and recalled
automatically by the driving position memory and seat position memory.
(P. 70, 74)
■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the
first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■ Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely
because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from
your Lexus dealer free of charge.
83
Before driving
large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 127)
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more
than one person at once, including children.
● Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat
belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary.
The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well
back in the seats.
● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause
death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident. (P. 81)
■ Seat belt pretensioners
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so
will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting
the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the
front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision.
● If the pretensioner has activated, the seat belt becomes locked: it cannot be fur-
ther extended, nor will it return to the stowed position. The seat belt cannot be
used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.
84
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■ Child restraint lock function belt precaution
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed
in the door.
● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts.
Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot
protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
● Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus
dealer.
● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in
a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts.
Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly resulting in
death or serious injury.
■ Precaution for pre-collision seat belts
Do not rely on the pre-collision system to avoid accidents. Always pay attention to
the surrounding conditions, and drive safely and responsibly.
■ Using a seat belt extender
● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because
the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by
another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally
intended.
85
1
Before driving
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the belt
becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the belt out
leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut
the belt.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
NOTICE
■ When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
86
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position while the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
1
Before driving
Up
Down
Away from the driver
Toward the driver
Auto tilt away
When the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned OFF, the
steering wheel returns to its
stowed position by moving up and
away to enable easier driver entry
and exit.
Switching to ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode will return
the steering wheel to the original
position.
■ Automatic adjustment of the steering position
A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically
by the driving position memory. (P. 70)
87
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
88
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles
behind and automatically reduce the reflected light.
Turns automatic mode on/ off
1
Before driving
The indicator comes on when
automatic mode is turned on.
The mirror will revert to automatic mode each time the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch
is turned to IGNITION ON
mode.
■ To prevent sensor error
To ensure that the sensors operate properly,
do not touch or cover them.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
89
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Outside rear view mirrors
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
Selects a mirror to adjust
(“L”: left or “R”: right)
Adjusts the mirror up, down,
in, or out using the switch
Folding and extending the mirrors
Folds the mirrors
Extends the mirrors
Putting the outside rear view mirror folding switch in the neutral
position sets the mirrors in automatic mode. Automatic mode
allows the folding or extending of
the mirrors to be linked to locking/
unlocking of the doors.
■ When the mirrors are fogged up
Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (P. 279)
■ Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle
A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically
by the driving position memory. (P. 70)
90
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Linked mirror function when reversing
The outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle
is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. However, this function will
not operate when the mirror select switch is in the neutral position (between “L” and
“R”).
1
■ Auto anti-glare function
CAUTION
■ When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■ When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand
caught by the moving mirror.
■ When the mirror defoggers are operating
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn
you.
91
Before driving
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside
rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (P. 89)
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows
The power windows can be opened and closed using the following
switches.
Closing
One-touch closing*
Opening
One-touch opening*
*: Pushing the switch in the oppo-
site direction will stop window
travel partway.
Lock switch
Press the switch down to lock passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent children
from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.
92
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■ The power windows can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Door lock linked window operation
1
● The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.
(P. 653)
(P. 45)
● The power windows can be closed using the entry function. (P. 33)
■ Operating the power windows after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
OFF
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window
travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable features
P. 692)
93
Before driving
● The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control.
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
CAUTION
■ Closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a
position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some
instances, even death.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func-
tion.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the window fully closes.
94
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Moon roof
Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up and
down.
■ Opening and closing
1
Open
Before driving
The moon roof stops slightly
before the fully open position to
reduce wind noise. Press the
switch again to fully open.
Close
Lightly press either of the moon
roof switches to stop the moon roof
partway.
■ Tilting up and down
Tilt up
Tilt down
Lightly press either of the moon
roof switches to stop the moon roof
partway.
: If equipped
95
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■ The moon roof can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Moon roof open warning buzzer
The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the
instrument panel when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned OFF and the
driver's door is opened with the moon roof open.
■ Door lock linked moon roof operation
● The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. (P. 653)
● The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control. (P. 45)
● The moon roof can be closed using the entry function. (P. 33)
■ Operating the moon roof after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing or tilting
down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■ When the moon roof does not close normally
Pressing and holding the “CLOSE” switch will close the moon roof.
■ Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will
open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable features
P. 692)
96
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
CAUTION
■ Opening the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
1
● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while
Before driving
it is moving.
● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■ Closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a
position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func-
tion.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the moon roof fully closes.
97
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:
■ Before refueling the vehicle
Close all the doors and windows, and turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF.
■ Opening the fuel tank cap
98
STEP 1
Press the opener switch.
STEP 2
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to
open.
STEP 3
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
1-5. Refueling
Closing the fuel tank cap
When replacing the fuel tank cap,
turn it until a clicking sound is
heard.
■ Fuel types
Use unleaded gasoline. (Octane rating 91 [Research Octane Number 96] or
higher)
■ Fuel tank capacity
Approximately 22.1 gal. (84 L, 18.4 Imp. gal.)
■ When the fuel filler door opener is inoperable
The lever can be used to open the fuel filler
door if the fuel filler door cannot be opened
using the inside switch.
99
Before driving
After releasing your hand, the cap
will turn slightly to the opposite
direction.
1
1-5. Refueling
CAUTION
■ Refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted
metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static
electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can
cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until
the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to
come close to an open fuel tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
■ When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.
Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious
injury.
NOTICE
■ Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted
surface.
100
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine
from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's
on-board computer.
1
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
Before driving
The indicator light flashes after
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been turned OFF to
indicate that the system is operating.
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type of the engine immobilizer system.
■ Conditions affecting operation
Depending on surrounding environment and conditions, the engine immobilizer
system may not operate properly. This may prevent the engine from starting.
(P. 37)
■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
101
1-6. Theft deterrent system
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the key
Do not modify, remove or disable the engine immobilizer system. If any unauthorized changes or modifications are made, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
102
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Alarm
The system sounds the alarm and flashes lights when forcible entry is
detected.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm is triggered in the following situations:
1
Before driving
● A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other
than using the entry function, wireless remote control or key. (The
doors will lock again automatically.)
● The hood is opened while the vehicle is locked.
■ Setting the alarm system
Close the doors, trunk and
hood, and lock all doors.
The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from
being on to flashing when the
system is set.
■ Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm:
● Unlock the doors or trunk.
● Start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a
few seconds.)
103
1-6. Theft deterrent system
■ Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the
following:
● Nobody is in the vehicle.
● The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
● A person inside the vehicle opens a door, the trunk or hood.
● The battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked.
■ Panic mode
When
is pressed for longer than about
one second, an alarm will sound for about 60
seconds and the vehicle lights flash to deter
any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on the
wireless remote control.
104
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.)
These labels are attached to the
vehicle to reduce vehicle theft
by facilitating the tracing and
recovery of parts from stolen
vehicles. Do not remove under
penalty of law.
1
Before driving
105
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive in a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (P. 60)
Adjust the position of the seat
forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached
and
easily
depressed to the extent
required. (P. 60)
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily operable.
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel downward so the SRS
driver airbag is facing your
chest. (P. 87)
Adjust the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (P. 78)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P. 80)
106
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ While driving
● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.
1
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
● Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and
stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment
mechanism may also be damaged.
■ Adjusting the seat position
● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are
not injured by the moving seat.
● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
107
Before driving
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the
effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or
serious injury to the driver or passenger.
1-7. Safety information
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of
severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They
work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious
injury.
SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components
Knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection
108
1-7. Safety information
SRS side and curtain shield airbags
Front SRS side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
Rear SRS side airbags (with power rear seat only)
Can help protect the torso of the outside rear seat occupants
SRS curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of outside occupants
1
Before driving
SRS seat cushion airbag (relaxation seat on 4-seat models)
Can help restrain the relaxation seat occupant
109
1-7. Safety information
SRS airbag system components
Front passenger occupant
detection sensor
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
Knee airbags
Front passenger airbag
Curtain shield airbags
Front side airbags
Side and curtain shield airbag
sensors
Curtain shield airbag sensors
SRS warning light
Rear side airbags
Seat cushion airbag
Driver airbag
Driver's seat belt buckle
switch
Driver's seat position sensor
Airbag sensor assembly
Front airbag sensors
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system
controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. The
driver airbag system consists of the driver seat’s position sensor etc. The
front passenger’s airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant
classification sensor etc.
110
1-7. Safety information
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag sensor.
■ SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors,
side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor
assemblies, driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system, “AIR BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator light, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power sources.
(P. 628)
■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating)
SRS airbag.
● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as
well as the seats, and parts of the front pillar and roof side rail, may be hot for
several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
● The front windshield may crack.
111
1
Before driving
In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag system
triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quickly
fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.
1-7. Safety information
■ Operating conditions (SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion airbag)
● The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion airbag will deploy if the severity of
the frontal impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an
approximate 15 mph (25 km/h) collision when the vehicle impacts straight into
a fixed barrier that does not move or deform.
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on
impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
● It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehi-
cle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags, SRS seat
cushion airbag and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.
● The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger sitting
in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy if
luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even if the seat is unoccupied.(P. 80)
■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a colli-
sion (SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion airbag)
The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion airbag may also deploy if a serious
impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the
illustration.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or vehicle falling
112
1-7. Safety information
■ Operating conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
● The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the
passenger compartment is subjected to certain types of severe impacts from
the side.
● The front SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no
1
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (SRS front airbags and SRS
Before driving
passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front SRS side airbag
on the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is
unoccupied. (P. 80)
seat cushion airbag)
The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion airbag are generally not designed to
inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is
involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type
causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front
airbags and SRS seat cushion airbag may occur.
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
113
1-7. Safety information
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags
(SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle
is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of
the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
● Collision from the side to the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment
● Collision from the side at an angle
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to
inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is
involved in a low-speed side collision.
● Collision from the front
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
114
1-7. Safety information
■ When to contact your Lexus dealer
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting them.
● Any of the SRS airbags has been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or
● A portion of the doors is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an
accident that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.
● The pad section of the steering wheel,
dashboard near the front passenger airbag
or lower portion of the instrument panel is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
● Relaxation seat on 4-seat models: The seat
cushion surface is scratched, cracked, or
otherwise damaged.
115
Before driving
deformed, or was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause the
SRS airbags to inflate.
1
1-7. Safety information
● The surface of the seats with the side air-
bag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars
or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
116
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
1
● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or
serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation,
placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a
clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering
wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can
change your driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm)
distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the
back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to
see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the
seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag
toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument
panel controls.
117
Before driving
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● If the seat belt extender has been con-
nected to the driver's seat belt buckle but
the seat belt extender has not also been
fastened to the latch plate of the driver's
seat belt, the SRS driver's airbag system
will judge that the driver is wearing the seat
belt even though the seat belt has not been
connected. In this case, the driver's airbag
may not activate correctly in a collision,
resulting in death or serious injury in the
event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat
belt with the seat belt extender.
● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can
cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the
airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with
the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seri-
ously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a
seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle
and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children.
(P. 127)
118
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean
against the dashboard.
SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on
the knees of a front passenger.
● Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or
passenger have items resting on their
knees.
● Do not lean against the door, the roof side
rail or the front, side and rear pillars.
● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the pas-
senger seats toward the door or put their
head or hands outside the vehicle.
119
Before driving
● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the
1
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not attach anything to or lean anything
against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad or lower portion of the
instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles when
SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.
● Do not attach anything to areas such as the
door, windshield glass, side door glass,
front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assist
grip.
● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard
objects on the coat hooks. All of these
items could become projectiles and seriously injure or kill you, should the SRS curtain shield airbag deploy.
● If the vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure
to remove it.
● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags
and SRS seat cushion airbag inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the SRS
airbags.
● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag
components shown on P. 110.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have
deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door
or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off
any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and
front pillar garnish, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexus
dealer.
120
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so
■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer.
The SRS airbag may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or
serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument
panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side
rails
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant
compartment
● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo bar
etc.)
● Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability.
121
1
Before driving
will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting
the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the SRS front passenger airbag may
not deploy in the event of a collision.
1-7. Safety information
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and
activates or deactivates the devices for front passenger.
Without
touch screen
With
touch screen
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
122
1-7. Safety information
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
■ Adult*1
“AIR BAG
ON”
Off
Flashing*2
Activated
■ Child *3 or child restraint system*4
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
Indicator/
SRS
warning light
warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the right side
passenger seats
Devices
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
“AIR BAG
OFF”*5
Off
Flashing*2
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Activated
123
1
Before driving
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
Indicator/
SRS warning light
warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the right side
passenger seats
Devices
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
1-7. Safety information
■ Unoccupied
Indicator/
warning light
Devices
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
Not illuminated
indicator lights
SRS warning light
Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Side airbag on the right side
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Activated
Front passenger knee airbag
Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
■ There is a malfunction in the system
Indicator/
warning light
Devices
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the right side
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
“AIR BAG
OFF”
On
Off
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Activated
*1:
The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller
adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/
her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2:
In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*3:
When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in
the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an
adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
124
1-7. Safety information
*4:
Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be
installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable.
(P. 127)
*5:
In case indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to
install the child restraint system properly. (P. 132)
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Wear the seat belt properly.
● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the
buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the
seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle,
then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure
the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender
while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag, side airbag on the front passenger side and front passenger knee airbag may
not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of
collision.
● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on
the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on
the seatback with their legs.
● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
125
Before driving
CAUTION
1
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This
may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates
that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the
seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does
not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible
when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the
effectiveness of the seat belt system.
● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illu-
minated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit
up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger
seat fully rearward.
● When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat
in the proper order. (P. 132)
● Do not modify or remove the front seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise,
the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seat-
backs.
● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat
cushion surface.
● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
126
1-7. Safety information
Child restraint systems
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of
child restraint systems.
1
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much
safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.
● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child
restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (P. 132)
127
Before driving
Points to remember
1-7. Safety information
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according
to the age and size of the child.
Rear facing  Infant seat/convertible seat
Forward facing  Convertible seat
Booster seat
128
1-7. Safety information
■ When installing the child restraint system on a rear outboard seat (power rear
seat only)
When you have to use a child restraint system
in a rear outboard seat, adjust the following:
1
● The upper seatback to the rearmost posi● 4-seat models: The seatback to the most
upright position
● The seat cushion to the fully rearward
position
● The head restraint to the lowmost and
rearmost position
■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
● If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and
use the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 80)
129
Before driving
tion
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must
be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on
the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.
● Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to
the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the
child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even
if “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the
force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the
front passenger seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint system may be allowed to be installed on the
front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that
requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since
there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible even
if “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be
killed or seriously injured.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the
front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child
restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other
passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
130
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the
● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the
child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not
secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a
sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
■ Child restraint lock function belt precaution
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the belt
becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the belt out
leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut
the belt.
■ When the child restraint system is not in use
● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use.
Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or
store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the
event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
131
1
Before driving
door or the area of the seat, front pillar or roof side rail from which the SRS side
airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child
restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags
inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the outside rear seats using the LATCH anchors
or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided
for the rear outside seats. (Buttons displaying the location of
the anchors are attached to the
seats.)
Seat belts equipped with a child
restraint locking mechanism
(ALR/ELR belts except driver’s
seat belt) (P. 80)
Anchor bracket (for top tether
strap)
Anchor brackets are provided
for each rear seat.
132
1-7. Safety information
Installation with LATCH system
Vehicles with power rear seat: Adjust the seatback as upright as
possible.
Type A
STEP 1
Canada only
133
Before driving
Widen the gap between
the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
STEP 3 Latch the hooks of the
lower straps onto the
LATCH anchors.
STEP 4 If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether
strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
STEP 2
1
1-7. Safety information
Type B
Widen the gap between
the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
STEP 3 Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors.
STEP 4 If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether
strap anchors.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
STEP 2
Canada only
134
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
■ Rear-facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Place the child restraint system on
STEP 1
the rear seat facing the rear of the
vehicle.
1
Before driving
STEP 2
STEP 3
Run the seat belt through the child
restraint system and insert the
plate into the buckle. Make sure
that the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt and
then allow it to retract slightly in
order to activate the ALR lock
mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
135
1-7. Safety information
STEP 4
While pushing the child restraint
system down into the rear seat,
allow the shoulder belt to retract
until the child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
■ Forward-facing Convertible seat
Place the child restraint system on
STEP 1
the seat facing the front of the vehicle.
STEP 2
STEP 3
136
Run the seat belt through the child
restraint system and insert the
plate into the buckle. Make sure
that the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt and
allow it to retract to put it in lock
mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.
1-7. Safety information
STEP 4
While pushing the child restraint
system into the rear seat, allow the
shoulder belt to retract until the
child restraint system is securely in
place.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.
■ Booster seat
Place the booster seat on the seat
STEP 1
facing the front of the vehicle.
STEP 5
STEP 2
Sit the child in the booster seat. Fit
the seat belt to the booster seat
according to the manufacturer's
instructions and insert the plate
into the buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's
shoulder, and that the lap belt is as
low as possible. (P. 80)
137
Before driving
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
1
1-7. Safety information
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
STEP 1
STEP 2
Secure the child restraint using a
seat belt or a lower anchors, and
move the head restraint in place at
the lowest position. (P. 78)
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
138
1-7. Safety information
■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchors
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications
can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
■ When installing a booster seat
To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder
belt. (P. 82)
ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort to
the child.
139
Before driving
CAUTION
1
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix
the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child
restraint system and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the child restraint
system to the right-hand rear seat.
● Adjust the front passenger seat or rear
seats so that it does not interfere with the
child restraint system.
● Only put a forward-facing child restraint
system on the front seat when unavoidable.
When installing a forward-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seat, move
the seat as far back as possible even if “AIR
BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).
● 5-seat models: When installing a child restraint system in the rear center seat,
adjust both seat seatbacks as upright as possible. The seatbacks must be adjusted
to the same angle. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely
restrained and this may cause death or serious injuries in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is posi-
tioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away
from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failing to
do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
● When using the LATCH anchors for a child restraint system, adjust the seatback
as upright as possible.
● Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
140
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ When installing a child restraint system
● Push and pull the child restraint system from side to side and forward to be sure it
is secure.
1
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
turer.
■ Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt
will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious
injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around
the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system.
Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or
serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden
swerve or accident.
141
Before driving
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufac-
1-7. Safety information
142
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle.................. 144
2
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers
Engine (ignition) switch......... 152
Headlight switch ..................... 178
Automatic Transmission........ 156
Fog light switch ......................... 181
Turn signal lever....................... 160
Parking brake............................ 161
Windshield wipers and
washer ..................................... 182
Brake Hold ................................ 164
Headlight cleaner switch ..... 185
Horn ............................................ 166
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters................ 167
Indicators and warning
lights ......................................... 170
Multi-information display...... 174
2-4. Using other driving
systems
Cruise control.......................... 186
Dynamic radar cruise
control ..................................... 189
Intuitive parking assist........... 199
Electronically modulated
air suspension....................... 208
Rear view monitor
system...................................... 210
Driving assist systems............ 213
Pre-Collision System............. 219
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage ............... 223
Vehicle load limits.................. 226
Winter driving tips................. 228
Trailer towing .......................... 232
Dinghy towing......................... 233
143
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving.
■ Starting the engine (P. 152)
■ Driving
STEP 1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to “D”.
(P. 156)
STEP 2 Release the parking brake.
(P. 161)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■ Stopping
STEP 1 With the shift lever in “D”, depress the brake pedal.
STEP 2 If necessary, set the parking brake.
STEP 3
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the
shift lever to “P” or “N”.
(P. 156)
■ Parking the vehicle
STEP 1 With the shift lever in “D”, depress the brake pedal.
STEP 2 Set the parking brake.
(P. 161)
STEP 3 Shift the shift lever to “P”.
(P. 156)
STEP 4 Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch and stop the engine.
STEP 5 Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on
your person.
Starting on a steep uphill
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
144
Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to “D”.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Starting off on a hill
Hill-start assist control will operate. (P. 213)
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows
may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially
slippery.
● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because
■ Breaking in your new Lexus
To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to
observe:
● For the first 186 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 621 miles (1000 km):
•
•
•
•
Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
Avoid sudden acceleration.
Do not drive continuously in the low range in the “S” position.
Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking
brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding down.
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the
correct fuel. (P. 669)
145
When driving
there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing
the steering and brakes from operating properly.
2
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running.
This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator
pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will
result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in
operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle
only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal
using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
● Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or
roll forward while the shift lever is in “R”.
Doing so may result in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
● If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check
that the trunk is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver
drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
● Do not under any circumstances shift the shift lever to “P” or “R” while the vehicle
is moving.
Doing so can cause significant damage to the transmission system and may result
in a loss of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to “N” while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause insufficient engine braking and lead to an accident.
● Do not turn the engine off while driving.
The power steering system will not operate properly if the engine is not running.
146
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a
steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (P. 157)
● When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking brake to
prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing an accident.
● Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside
2
● Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their body are not
When driving
rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may
result in death or serious injury.
outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not drive the vehicle off-road.
This is not a AWD vehicle designed for real off-road driving. Proceed with all due
caution if it becomes unavoidable to drive off-road.
● Do not drive across river crossings or through other bodies of water.
This may cause electric/electronic components to short circuit, damage the
engine or cause other serious damage to the vehicle.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do
not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability
tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and
possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on
your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce
your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
● Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-shifting
or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.
● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that
the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from
functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning
properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.
147
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious injury.
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than “P” or “N”, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.
● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and
check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
● Always keep a foot on the brake pedal while the engine is running to prevent an
accident caused by the vehicle moving.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehi-
cle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic
material of eye glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of
the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components.
● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to “P”, stop the engine and
lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipes and the rear bumper diffusers while the engine is
running or immediately after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is
snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running,
exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
148
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed area, such
as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to
death or a serious health hazard.
● The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by
■ When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever or
depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to engine
overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust
gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.
■ When braking the vehicle
● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of
the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may
not securely hold the vehicle.
● If the electronically controlled brake system does not operate, do not follow other
vehicles closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, even though the brakes still operate, the brake pedal should be
depressed more firmly than usual. Braking distance also becomes longer.
● The brake system consists of 3 individual hydraulic systems: if one of the systems
fails, the others will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes longer. If this happens, do
not continue to drive the vehicle. If the brake system warning light (red indicator)
comes on together with buzzer sound while driving, immediately stop the vehicle
in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
■ If the vehicle becomes stuck or bogged (AWD models)
Do not spin the wheels recklessly when any of the tires is up in the air, or stuck in
sand or mud, etc. This may damage the drive system components or propel the
vehicle forward (or in another direction) and cause an accident.
149
When driving
corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer. Failure to do so may allow
exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.
2
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle
Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at
the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■ When parking the vehicle
Always put the shift lever in “P”. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or
the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally
depressed.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a long
time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damag-
ing the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
■ If a brake pad wear warning message is displayed
Have your Lexus dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as possible.
The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
Moderate levels of the brake pad and disc wear allow enhanced front braking
power. As a result, the discs may wear more quickly than conventional brake discs.
Therefore, when replacing the brake pads, Lexus recommends that you also have
the thickness of the discs measured.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or
that of the brake discs are exceeded.
■ If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.
● The vehicle will behave abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire. (P. 639)
150
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■ When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the
following serious damage to the vehicle:
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water immersion
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission,
differential, etc.
● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where
possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
151
2
When driving
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to
have your Lexus dealer check the following:
2-1. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on
your person starts the engine or changes “ENGINE START STOP” switch
modes.
■ Starting the engine
STEP 1 Check that the parking brake is set.
STEP 2 Check that the shift lever is set in “P”.
STEP 3 Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns green.
STEP 4
Press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
The engine can be started from
any mode.
152
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode
Modes can be changed by pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time
the switch is pressed.)
OFF*
Emergency flashers can be
used.
2
ACCESSORY mode
When driving
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can be
used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can
be used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
*: If the shift lever is in a position
other than “P” when turning off
the engine, the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch will be
turned to ACCESSORY mode,
not to OFF.
■ If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 101)
153
2-1. Driving procedures
■ When the steering lock cannot be released
The green indicator light on the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch will flash and a message will be shown on the multi-information
display. Press the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch again while turning the steering wheel
left and right.
■ When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator flashes in amber
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer immediately.
■ Auto power off function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than an hour with the shift lever
in “P”, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically turn OFF.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
P. 39
■ When the electronic key battery is discharged
P. 582
■ Conditions affecting operation
P. 37
■ Note for the entry function
P. 40
154
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Stopping the engine in an emergency
NOTICE
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode for long periods of time without the engine running.
■ When starting the engine
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine
checked immediately by your Lexus dealer.
155
2
When driving
If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, push and
hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 3 seconds.
However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving except in
an emergency. If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to
an unexpected accident.
2-1. Driving procedures
Automatic Transmission
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
■ Shifting the shift lever
While the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION
ON mode, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever.
■ Shift position uses
Shift position
Function
P
Parking the vehicle or starting the engine
R
Reversing
N
Neutral
D
Normal driving*1
S
“S” mode driving*2 (P. 157)
*1: To improve fuel consumption and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the
“D” position for normal driving.
2
* : Selecting shift ranges using “S” mode restricts the upper limit of the possi-
ble gear ranges, controls engine braking forces, and prevents unnecessary upshifting.
156
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Selecting a driving mode
The following patterns can be selected to suit current driving and
operating conditions.
Power mode
For powerful acceleration
and driving in mountainous
regions
Normal mode
Snow mode
For accelerating and driving
on slippery road surfaces,
such as on snow
2
When driving
Press “SNOW” to return to normal mode.
Changing shift ranges in “S” mode
Shift the shift lever to the “S” position and operate the shift lever.
Upshifting
Downshifting
The initial shift range in “S” mode is automatically set to “4”, “5”, “6” or “7”
according to vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to
“2” or “3” if the AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in the “D”
position. (P. 159)
157
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Shift ranges and their functions
Shift range
Function
8
Automatically selecting gears between “1” and “8”
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions
7
Automatically selecting gears between “1” and “7”
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions
6
Automatically selecting gears between “1” and “6”
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions
5
Automatically selecting gears between “1” and “5”
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions
4
Automatically selecting gears between “1” and “4”
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions
3
Automatically selecting gears between “1” and “3”
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions
2
Automatically selecting gears between “1” and “2”
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions
1
Setting the gear at “1”
A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift
range.
158
2-1. Driving procedures
■ “S” mode
● When the shift range is “6” or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets the
shift range to “8.”
● When the shift range is “6” or higher, moving the shift lever toward “-” may
change down by 2 shift ranges or more depending on driving conditions.
● To prevent the engine from over-revving, upshifting may automatically occur.
■ Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer (in the “S” mode)
■ When driving with the cruise control system
Engine brake will not operate in the “S” mode, even when downshifting to “7”, “6”,
“5” or “4”. (P. 186, 189)
■ Snow mode automatic deactivation
Snow mode is automatically deactivated if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned OFF after driving in snow mode.
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from “P”
P. 649
■ AI-SHIFT
The AI-SHIFT automatically shifts the gear to the optimal position according to the
driver performance and driving conditions.
The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the “D” and “S”position.
159
2
When driving
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even
when the shift lever is operated. (The warning buzzer will sound twice.)
2-1. Driving procedures
Turn signal lever
Right turn
Left turn
Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change.
The right hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change.
The left hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
■ Turn signals can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ If the indicators flash faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
160
2-1. Driving procedures
Parking brake
For the parking brake, an electrical parking brake system is adopted.
■ Manual mode
Sets the parking brake
U.S.A.
CANADA
If the parking brake switch is
operated when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is not in
IGNITION ON mode, the
parking brake indicator light will
come on and stay on for a while.
Press and hold the parking
brake switch if an emergency
occurs and it is necessary to
operate the parking brake while
driving.
2
When driving
Releases the parking brake
Operate the parking brake
switch while depressing the
brake pedal. Make sure that the
parking brake indicator light
goes off.
161
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Automatic mode
On/off
The parking brake is set automatically according to shift lever
operation.
Operate the shift lever with the
brake pedal depressed.
● When the shift lever is moved
out of “P”
The parking brake will be
released.
● When the shift lever is moved
into “P”
The parking brake will be set.
■ Parking brake operation
● When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is not in IGNITION ON mode, the
parking brake cannot be released using the parking brake switch.
● When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is not in IGNITION ON mode,
automatic mode (automatic brake setting and releasing) is not available.
● If the parking brake is operated repeatedly over a short period of time, the sys-
tem may restrict operation to prevent overheating. If this happens, refrain from
operating the parking brake. Normal operation will return after about 1 minute.
■ Parking brake indicator light
When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned OFF with the parking brake
set, the parking brake indicator light will stay on for about 15 seconds. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
■ Parking brake operation sound
When the parking brake operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
162
2-1. Driving procedures
■ When there is a malfunction in the system
Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 627, 636)
Depending on the condition, the parking brake indicator light may flash.
NOTICE
■ When parking the vehicle
Before you leave the vehicle, set the parking brake, shift the shift lever to “P” and
make sure that the vehicle does not move.
2
■ When the system malfunctions
■ When the parking brake cannot be released due to a malfunction
Use the parking brake release tool to manually release the parking brake.
(P. 650)
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.
163
When driving
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the warning messages.
2-1. Driving procedures
Brake Hold
The brake hold system keeps the brake applied when the shift lever is in
“D”, “S” or “N” with the system on and the brake pedal has been depressed
to stop the vehicle. The system releases the brake when the accelerator
pedal is depressed with the shift lever in “D” or “S” to allow smooth start off.
Turns the brake hold system on.
The brake hold standby indicator comes on. While the system
is holding the brake, the brake
hold operated indicator light
comes on.
■ Brake hold system operating conditions
The brake hold system cannot be turned on in the following conditions:
● The trunk or hood is not closed.
● The driver's door is not closed.
● The driver is not wearing the seat belt.
If any of the conditions above are detected when the brake hold system is enabled,
the system will turn off and the brake hold operated indicator light will go off. In
addition, if any of the conditions are detected while the system is holding the brake,
a warning buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-information
display. The parking brake will then be set automatically.
164
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Brake hold function
● If the brake pedal is left released for a period of about 3 minutes after the sys-
tem has started holding the brake, the parking brake will be set automatically. In
this case, a warning buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display.
● To turn the system off while the system is holding the brake, firmly depress the
brake pedal and press the button again.
● The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle when the vehicle is on a steep
incline. In this situation, it may be necessary for the driver to apply the brakes.
The multi-information display will inform the driver of this situation.
brakes
The parking brake will not be released automatically. Release the parking brake by
operating the parking brake switch, making sure that the parking brake indicator
light goes off. (P. 161)
■ When there is a malfunction in the system
Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 627, 636)
CAUTION
■ When stopped on a slippery road
The system cannot stop the vehicle when the gripping ability of the tires has been
exceeded. Do not use the system when stopped on a slippery road.
NOTICE
■ When parking the vehicle
The brake hold system is not designed for use when parking the vehicle for a long
period of time. Turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF while the system is
holding the brake may release the brake, which would cause the vehicle to move.
When operating the “ENGINE START STOP” switch, depress the brake pedal, set
the parking brake and shift the shift lever to “P”.
165
When driving
■ When the parking brake is set automatically while the system is holding the
2
2-1. Driving procedures
Horn
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the
mark.
166
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
2
When driving
The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may
differ depending on the model/type.
The following gauges, meters and display illuminate when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute
Multi-information display
P. 174
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
Trip meter and trip meter reset buttons
Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven
Trip meter
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last
reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different
distances independently.
167
2-2. Instrument cluster
Instrument panel light control buttons
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
Trip meter and trip meter reset buttons
Changes the display
Resets the trip meter currently
displayed to “0”
Instrument panel light control buttons
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Darker
Brighter
168
2-2. Instrument cluster
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indi-
cates the maximum engine speed.
● The engine may be overheating if the temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In
this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after
it has cooled completely. (P. 660)
2
When driving
169
2-2. Instrument cluster
Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center
panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
Instrument cluster
The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may
differ depending on the model/type.
Center panel (without touch screen)
170
2-2. Instrument cluster
Center panel (with touch screen)
2
When driving
■ Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(P. 160)
(U.S.A.)
(CANADA)
Cruise control indicator
(P. 186, 189)
Headlight high beam indicator (P. 178)
* “AFS OFF” indicator
Headlight indicator
(P. 178)
* Slip indicator
Tail light indicator
(P. 178)
* Brake hold standby indi-
Front fog light indicator
(P. 181)
* Brake hold operated indi-
(P. 179)
(P. 214)
cator (P. 164)
cator (P. 164)
171
2-2. Instrument cluster
“ECT PWR” indicator
(P. 157)
“ECT SNOW” indicator
(P. 157)
Parking brake indicator
(P. 161)
(U.S.A.)
(CANADA)
Parking brake indicator
(P. 161)
*
(if equipped)
(if equipped)
(if equipped)
172
“SPORT” mode indicator
(P. 208)
“COMFORT” mode indicator (P. 208)
“HEIGHT HIGH” indicator (P. 208)
SRS airbag on-off indicator (P. 122)
(without
touch
screen)
*
(with touch
screen)
SRS airbag on-off indicator (P. 122)
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle’s systems. (P. 627)
*
*
*
(U.S.A.)
*
(CANADA)
*
*
*
(U.S.A.)
*
(U.S.A.)
*
(CANADA)
*
2
(CANADA)
When driving
*
*
*
(if equipped)
*: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned
to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on,
or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
CAUTION
■ If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS airbag warning light not
come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not
available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious
injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.
173
2-2. Instrument cluster
Multi-information display
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of drivingrelated data, including the current outside air temperature.
● Trip information
(P. 175)
Displays cruising range, fuel consumption and other cruising
related information.
● Shift position and shift range
(P. 156)
● Intuitive parking assist display (if equipped)
(P. 199)
Automatically displayed when
using intuitive parking assist.
● Dynamic radar cruise control display (if equipped)
(P. 189)
Automatically displayed when
using dynamic radar cruise control.
● Warning messages
(P. 636)
Automatically displayed when a
malfunction occurs in one of the
vehicle’s systems.
174
2-2. Instrument cluster
Trip information
Type A
“DISP” switch
Display items can be switched by
pressing the “DISP” switch.
“RESET” switch
2
When driving
Type B
■ Outside temperature
Displays the outside air temperature
The temperature range that can be displayed is from -40F (-40C) to
122F (50C).
■ Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the
quantity of fuel remaining
• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a
result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not
be updated.
175
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Average fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset
The function can be reset by pressing the “RESET” switch when the average
fuel consumption is displayed.
■ Current fuel consumption
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption
■ Average fuel consumption after refueling
Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was last refueled
■ Distance after refueling
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the vehicle was
last refueled
■ Elapsed time
Displays the elapsed time since it was last reset
The function can be reset by pressing the “RESET” switch when the elapsed
time is displayed.
■ Average vehicle speed
Displays the average vehicle speed since the engine was started or the
function was reset
The function can be reset by pressing the “RESET” switch when the average
vehicle speed is displayed.
■ Tire inflation pressure
Displays inflation pressure of each tire. There is no correlation between
the order of the displayed values and the tire positions
It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode. It may
also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation
pressure has been adjusted.
176
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ System check display
After switching the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode,
“SYSTEM CHECK” is displayed while system operation is checked. When the system check is complete, the normal screen will return.
■ Outside temperature display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or
the display may take longer than normal to change.
2
● When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a
■ To turn off the background images on the trip information screen
When information is displayed together with a background image, press the “DISP”
switch for 1 second or more.
Pressing the switch again for longer than 1 second turns on the background images.
■ Tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also be
different from the values measured using other gauges.
■ Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem to continue using the display.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Setting of available languages can be changed. (Customizable features P. 692)
NOTICE
■ The multi-information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may
respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
177
When driving
garage, tunnel, etc.)
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
The side marker, parking,
tail, license plate and
instrument panel lights
turn on.
U.S.A.
CANADA
The headlights and all
lights listed above turn
on.
The headlights, other
exterior lights and instrument panel lights turn on
and off automatically.
(When the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is
in IGNITION ON
mode)
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push the
lever away from you to turn on
the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the
center position to turn the high
beams off.
Pull the lever toward you to turn
on the high beams.
Release to turn them off. You can
flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.
178
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
AFS
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) improves visibility at intersections
and on curves by automatically adjusting the direction of light axis of the
headlights according to vehicle speed and the degree of the tire angle
that are controlled by steering input.
Operates at speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.
■ Deactivating AFS
2
On/off
■ Daytime running light system
To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the engine is started and the parking brake
is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.
■ Headlight control sensor
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting
the level of ambient light and may cause the
automatic headlight system to malfunction.
179
When driving
The indicator turns on when the
AFS is deactivated.
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■ Automatic light off system
● When the headlights come on: The headlights turn off 30 seconds after a door
is opened and closed if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch has been switched
to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. (The lights turn off immediately if
on the key is pressed after all doors are locked.)
● When only the tail lights come on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF and driver’s door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the light switch
or
position.
off once and then back to the
■ Automatic headlight leveling system
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of
passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do
not interfere with other road users.
■ If the “AFS OFF” indicator flashes
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 692)
NOTICE
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
180
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Fog light switch
The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain
or fog. The fog lights can be turned on only when the headlights are on low
beam.
To turn the front fog lights off
To turn the front fog lights on
2
When driving
181
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Windshield wipers and washer
With “AUTO” selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the
sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in
accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.
Rain-sensing wiper operation
Low speed wiper operation
High speed wiper operation
Temporary operation
Sensor sensitivity (high)
Sensor sensitivity (low)
182
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Wash/wipe operation
Wipers operate automatically.
(After operating several times,
the wipers operate one more
time after a short delay to prevent dripping.)
2
When driving
■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation
With the settings other than “AUTO” also, the time until drop prevention wiper
sweep occurs is changed depending on vehicle speed.
With low speed wiper operation selected, wiper operation will be switched from
low speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary.
(However, when the sensor sensitivity is adjusted to the highest, the mode cannot
be switched.)
■ “AUTO” mode
The raindrop sensor judges the amount of
raindrops.
An optical sensor is adopted. It may not operate properly when sunlight from the rising or
setting of the sun intermittently strikes the
windshield, or if bugs etc. are present on the
windshield.
If the wiper switch is turned to “AUTO” position while the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the wiper will operate once to show that auto
mode is activated.
183
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked and if there is washer fluid in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
■ Headlight cleaner linked operation (if equipped on headlight cleaner)
When the windshield washer is operated with the headlights on, the headlight
cleaner will operate once.
CAUTION
■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in auto mode
The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the
windshield is subject to vibration in auto mode. Take care that your fingers or anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.
NOTICE
■ When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you
and held continually.
184
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Headlight cleaner switch
Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.
Press the switch to clean the
headlights.
2
When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the
headlight switch is turned on.
■ Windshield washer linked operation
When the windshield washer is operated with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
in IGNITION ON mode and the headlights on, the headlight cleaner will operate
once. (P. 182)
NOTICE
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the switch is pressed continually.
: If equipped
185
When driving
■ The headlight cleaner can be operated when
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without using the accelerator.
Indicator
Cruise control switch
■ Set the vehicle speed
STEP 1
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Press the button once more to
deactivate the cruise control.
STEP 2
Accelerate or decelerate to the
desired speed and push the
lever down to set the speed.
: If equipped
186
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Adjusting the speed setting
Increases speed
Decreases speed
Hold the lever until the desired
speed setting is obtained.
Fine adjustment of the set speed
can be made by lightly pushing
the lever up or down and releasing it.
2
When driving
■ Canceling and resuming regular acceleration
Cancel
Push the lever towards you to
cancel cruise control.
The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are
applied.
Resume
To resume cruise control and
return to the set speed, push the
lever up.
Resuming is available when
vehicle speed is approximately
25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
■ Cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in “D” or the “4”, “5”, “6”, “7” or “8” range of “S” position.
● Vehicle speed is between approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and 125 mph
(200 km/h).
■ Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
187
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Automatic cruise control cancellation
The cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations:
● Actual vehicle speed falls more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle
speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40km/h).
● VSC is activated.
■ If the cruise control indicator light flashes
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately
after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Keep the “ON-OFF” button off when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in control of the vehicle being lost and could cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On winding roads
● On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
188
2-4. Using other driving systems
Dynamic radar cruise control
Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control
with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates
in order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.
Indicator
Display
Cruise control switch
Distance switch
2
When driving
■ Set the vehicle speed
STEP 1
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Press the button once more to
deactivate the cruise control.
: If equipped
189
2-4. Using other driving systems
STEP 2
Accelerate or decelerate to the
desired speed and push the
lever down to set the speed.
Selecting conventional constant speed control mode
Press the “ON-OFF” button
to activate the cruise control.
Press the button once more to
deactivate the cruise control.
Switch to constant speed
control mode.
(Push the lever away from
you and hold for approximately one second.)
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is always reset when
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is turned to IGNITION
ON mode.
■ Adjusting the speed setting
Increases speed
Decreases speed
Hold the lever until the desired
speed setting is displayed.
Fine adjustment of the set speed
can be made by lightly pushing
the lever up or down and releasing it.
190
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Canceling and resuming the speed setting
Cancel
Push the lever towards you to
cancel cruise control.
The setting is also canceled
when the brakes are applied.
Resume
2
When driving
To resume cruise control and
return to the set speed, push the
lever up.
Resuming is available when
vehicle speed is approximately
28 mph (45 km/h) or more.
■ Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Each press of the switch
Preceding vehicle mark
changes the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance
Long
Medium
Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance
is set automatically to the long
mode when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is turned
to IGNITION ON mode.
A mark will be displayed to indicate the presence of the vehicle
if a vehicle is running ahead of
you.
191
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles
within approximately 400 ft. (120 m) ahead and to judge the distance
between your vehicle and those vehicles.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long
downhill slopes.
Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
switch.
Example of deceleration cruising
When the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, in the same lane, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in
vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone
warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your
vehicle from closing on the vehicle ahead.
192
2-4. Using other driving systems
Example of follow-up cruising
When following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed
The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the
speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.
Example of acceleration
When there are no longer vehicles driving slower than the set speed in
the lane ahead
Approach warning
When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will
flash and buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this would
be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a vehicle.
Apply the brakes to ensure an appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
■ Warning lights and messages for dynamic radar cruise control
Warning lights and messages are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform
the driver of the need for caution while driving. (P. 636)
■ Switching modes
The mode cannot be switched to constant speed control mode if vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode has been used. The mode also cannot be switched from
constant speed control to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode. Turn the system off by pressing the “ON-OFF” button, and turn it on again.
■ The dynamic radar cruise can be set when
● The shift lever is in “D” or the “4”, “5”, “6”, “7” or “8” range of “S” position.
● Vehicle speed is between approximately 27 mph (43 km/h) and 87 mph (139
km/h).
193
2
When driving
When the vehicle ahead of you executes a lane change, the system slowly
accelerates until the set vehicle speed is reached. The system then returns to
fixed speed cruising.
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
■ Automatically canceling vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following situations.
● Actual vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h)
● VSC is activated
● The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way.
● The windshield wipers are operating at high speed.
● The driving mode select switch is set to snow mode.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other
reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Automatic cancelation of constant speed control
The cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in the following situations:
● Actual vehicle speed is more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle
speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Actual vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
■ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond
to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/
decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.
194
Distance options
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long
Approximately 164 ft. (50 m)
Medium
Approximately 132 ft. (40 m)
Short
Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Radar sensor and grille
Always keep the sensor and grille clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice or plastic
objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.)
Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.
Radar sensor
2
When driving
■ Approach warning
In the following instances, there is a possibility that the warnings will not occur:
● When the speed of the vehicle ahead matches or exceeds your vehicle’s speed
● Immediately after the cruise control speed has been set
● At the instant the accelerator is applied
195
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR002 and HYQDNMWR004
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radio frequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control
Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Be aware of the set vehicle speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not
appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle
and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes etc.
■ To avoid operating dynamic radar cruise control by mistake
Keep the “ON-OFF” button off when not in use.
196
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in control of the vehicle being lost and could cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
2
● On winding roads
● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and
down gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● At entrances to expressways
● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors
from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, etc.)
● When the approach warning buzzer can be heard often
■ When the radar sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in
front of you.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the
approach warning (P. 193) will not be activated, and an accident may result.
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving
● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
197
When driving
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function
correctly
Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may
not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and an accident may result:
● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function-
ing of the radar sensor
● When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the trunk etc.)
● When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow
● When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable
● When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly
■ To ensure the radar sensor functions correctly
Do not do the following to the sensor or grille as doing so may cause the sensor not
to function correctly and could result in an accident:
● Stick or attach anything to it
● Leave it dirty
● Disassemble, subject it to strong shocks
● Modify or paint it
● Replace it with a non-genuine part
■ Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the cruise control system can function effectively:
● Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.
● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the
sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area
inspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille or surrounding area.
● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille.
198
2-4. Using other driving systems
Intuitive parking assist
The distance to obstacles measured by the sensors is communicated via
the multi-information display and a buzzer when parallel parking or
maneuvering into a garage. Always check the surrounding area when
using this system.
■ Types of sensors
Front side sensors
Front corner sensors
Front center sensors
Rear corner sensors
Rear center sensors
2
When driving
■ Intuitive parking assist switch
On/off
When on, the indicator light
comes on and the buzzer
sounds to inform the driver that
the system is operational.
Press the button to switch the
on/off mode.
: If equipped
199
2-4. Using other driving systems
Display
When the sensors detect an obstacle, the graphic is shown on the multiinformation display and touch screen (if equipped) according to position
and distance to the obstacle.
■ Multi-information display
Front side sensors and front corner sensors operation
Front center sensors operation
Rear corner sensors operation
Rear center sensors operation
■ Touchscreen (if equipped)
When the vehicle is moving forward
The graphic is automatically displayed when an obstacle is
detected. The screen can be set so
that the graphic is not displayed.
(P. 205)
When the vehicle is moving backward
A simplified image is displayed on
the right upper corner when an
obstacle is detected.
200
2-4. Using other driving systems
The distance display and buzzer
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate
distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.
■ Center sensors
Level
1
2
3
4
2
Buzzer
Slow
Medium
Fast
Continuous
2
3
4
Medium
Fast
Continuous
■ Corner sensors and side sensors
Level
1
Display
example of
front right
sensor
-
Buzzer
-
201
When driving
Display
example of
front center
sensor
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Detection level and approximate distance to an obstacle
202
Level
1
2
3
Front side
sensors
-
1.5 to 1.1 ft.
1.1 to 1.0 ft.
(50 to 37.5 cm) (37.5 to 30 cm)
1.0 ft. (30 cm)
or less
Front corner
sensors
-
1.8 to 1.1 ft.
1.1 to 1.0 ft.
(60 to 37.5 cm) (37.5 to 30 cm)
1.0 ft. (30 cm)
or less
Front center
3.0 to 1.5 ft.
1.5 to 1.1 ft.
1.1 to 1.0 ft.
sensors
(100 to 50 cm) (50 to 37.5 cm) (37.5 to 30 cm)
1.0 ft. (30 cm)
or less
Rear corner
sensors
-
1.8 to 1.1 ft.
1.1 to 0.8 ft
(60 to 37.5 cm) (37.5 to 25 cm)
0.8 ft. (25 cm)
or less
Rear center
sensors
4.5 to 2.0 ft.
(150 to 60 cm)
2.0 to 1.4 ft.
(60 to 45 cm)
1.1 ft. (35 cm) or
less
1.4 to 1.1 ft.
(45 to 35 cm)
4
2-4. Using other driving systems
Sensors that operate and detection range
The following diagrams show the sensor detection range. Note that sensors may not be able to detect obstacles that are extremely close to the
vehicle.
■ Sensors that operate
Vehicles with advanced parking guidance system
Forward
2
Backward
When driving
Vehicles without advanced parking guidance system
Forward
Backward
203
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Detection range of the sensors
Approx. 3.0 ft. (100 cm)
Approx. 4.5 ft. (150 cm)
Approx. 1.5 ft. (50 cm)
Approx. 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
The diagram shows the detection
range of the sensors. Note that the
sensors may not be able to detect
obstacles that are extremely close
to the vehicle.
The range of the sensors may
change depending on the shape of
the object etc.
204
2-4. Using other driving systems
Customization of the intuitive parking assist (vehicles with a touch screen)
The buzzer volume, display and buzzer timing and display of the graphic
on the screen can be customized.
Press
to display the information screen, and touch
■ Buzzer volume
STEP 1 Touch
STEP 2
.
Touch a switch (from
to
) to adjust the buzzer volume, and
.
■ Display and buzzer timing
STEP 1 Touch
.
STEP 2 Set the display and buzzer timing for the front and the rear center
sensors. When
or
is touched, the triangle marks
move between green (turns on at level 1) and orange (turns on at
level 2) to select the timing.
■ Display of the graphic on the screen when the vehicle is moving forward
Touch
. When this switch is touched, display setting switches
between on and off.
205
2
When driving
touch
.
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Sensor detection information
● Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the
ability of a sensor to correctly detect an obstacle. Particular instances where this
may occur are listed below.
•
•
•
•
•
•
There is dirt, snow or ice on a sensor.
A sensor is frozen.
A sensor is covered in any way.
The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass
The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines,
air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.
• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.
• A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or radio antenna.
• Towing eyelets are installed.
• A bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall or right-angled curb.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.
• A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered suspension, etc.) is installed.
In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their
shapes, signs and other objects may be judged by a sensor to be closer than they
are.
● The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Pay particular
attention to the following obstacles:
•
•
•
•
•
Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb radio waves
Sharply-angled objects
Low obstacles
Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your
vehicle
■ If the display flashes and a message is displayed
P. 636
■ Certification (Canada only)
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
206
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer (without a touch screen)
Settings (e.g. buzzer volume) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 692)
CAUTION
■ Caution when using the intuitive parking assist
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.
2
● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
When driving
● Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range.
NOTICE
■ Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
207
2-4. Using other driving systems
Electronically modulated air suspension
The vehicle adjusts the damping of the shock absorbers and maintains vehicle height automatically in response to driving conditions to help provide
enhanced driving comfort and vehicle control.
■ Vehicle height adjustment
The vehicle’s height is maintained at the selected level regardless of the
number of occupants and luggage weight.
Turn the “HEIGHT HIGH”
switch on.
The indicator light comes on.
Press the switch once more to
cancel the high mode.
■ Damping mode selection
You can select the damping mode of the shock absorbers.
Sport
The indicator light comes on.
Normal
Comfort
The indicator light comes on.
■ Operating sound of the air suspension compressor
When the vehicle height is lowered, such as when entering or loading the vehicle,
or high mode is selected, the compressor may operate and a whirring sound may
be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
: If equipped
208
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Be sure to stop the engine in the following situations in order to stop operation of
the electronically modulated air suspension:
● The vehicle is parked on a curb.
● Any of the wheels is stuck in a ditch.
● It is necessary to jack up the vehicle.
● It is necessary to tow the vehicle with part of it lifted.
209
2
When driving
If the “ENGINE START STOP” switch remains in IGNITION ON mode, the vehicle height may change, resulting in an accidental damage.
2-4. Using other driving systems
Rear view monitor system
The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of
the area behind the vehicle. The image is displayed in reverse on the
screen. This reversed image is a similar image to the one on the inside rear
view mirror.
For the advanced parking guidance system, refer to the “Navigation
System Owner’s Manual”.
The rear view image is displayed
when the shift lever is in the “R”
position.
If the shift lever is shifted out of
R, the screen returns to the previous one.
: If equipped
210
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Displayed area
The area covered by the camera is limited.
Objects that are close to either corner of
the bumper or under the bumper cannot
be seen on the screen.
The area displayed on the screen may vary
according to vehicle orientation or road
conditions.
2
When driving
■ Rear view monitor system camera
In the following cases, it may become difficult to see the images on the screen, even
when the system is functioning correctly:
● The vehicle is in a dark area, such as at
night.
● The temperature near the lens is
extremely high or low.
● Water droplets are on the camera lens
or humidity is high, such as when it
rains.
● Foreign matter, such as snow or mud,
adheres to the camera lens.
● The sun or headlights are shining
directly into the camera lens.
211
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Smear effect
If a bright light, such as sunlight reflected
off the vehicle body, is picked up by the
camera, a smear effect* characteristic to
the camera may occur.
*: Smear effect  A phenomenon that
occurs when a bright light is picked up by
the camera; when transmitted by the
camera, the light source appears to have
a vertical streak above and below it.
CAUTION
■ When using the rear view monitor system, observe the following precautions to
avoid an accident that could result in death or serious injuries:
● Never depend solely on the monitor system when reversing.
● Always check visually and with the mirrors to confirm your intended path is clear.
● Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual dis-
tances.
● Do not use the system if the trunk is open.
■ Conditions which may affect the rear view monitor system
● If the back of the vehicle has been hit, the camera’s position and mounting angle
may have changed. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● Rapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in
cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally.
● If the camera lens is dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. Rinse with water and
wipe with a soft cloth. If extremely dirty, wash with a mild cleanser and rinse.
● The displayed image may be darker and moving images may be slightly distorted
when the system is cold.
212
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems
operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware,
however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied
upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface
2
■ Brake assist
When driving
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation
■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on
slippery road surfaces
■ TRAC (Traction Control)
Maintains drive power and prevents any of the drive wheels from spinning
when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads
■ Hill-start assist control
Prevents the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting on an incline or
slippery slope
■ VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio Steering) (if equipped)
Adjusts the wheel turning angle in accordance with the vehicle speed and
steering wheel movement
■ EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn
the steering wheel
213
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management)
Provides integrated control of the ABS, brake assist, TRAC, VSC, hill-start
assist control, EPS, and VGRS (if equipped) systems
Maintains vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by
controlling the brakes and engine output, steering assist, and if equipped
with VGRS, steering ratio
■ Pre-Collision System (if equipped)
P. 219
When the VSC/TRAC/hill-start assist control systems are operating
If the vehicle is in danger of slipping, rolling backwards when
starting on an incline, or any of the
drive wheels spin, the indicator
flashes to indicate that the VSC/
TRAC/hill-start assist control systems have been engaged.
A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to
indicate that VSC is operating.
The stop lights and high mounted
stoplight turn on when the hill-start
assist control system is operating.
The slip indicator light flashes as
well when ABS is operating.
214
2-4. Using other driving systems
Disabling TRAC and/or VSC
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC and VSC may
reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn the
system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
● Turning off TRAC
Quickly press and release the
switch to turn off TRAC.
Press the switch again to turn the
system back on.
● Turning off TRAC and VSC
Press and hold the switch for more
than 3 seconds while the vehicle is
stopped to turn off TRAC and
VSC.
The slip indicator light will come on
and message will be shown on the
multi-information display.
Press the switch again to turn the
system back on.
215
When driving
The slip indicator light should come
on.
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC
Turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF after turning off the TRAC and
VSC systems will automatically re-enable them.
■ Automatic TRAC reactivation
If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when vehicle
speed increases.
■ Automatic TRAC/VSC reactivation
If the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on even when
vehicle speed increases.
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC, TRAC, hill-start
assist control and VGRS systems
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that
a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operat-
ing. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
● The steering wheel may be moved slightly or a sound may be heard when the
engine is started or stopped. None of these indicate that a malfunction has
occurred.
■ Hill-start assist control is operational when
● The shift lever is in the “D” or “S” position.
● The brake pedal is not depressed.
■ EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
216
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Conditions affecting VGRS operations
In the following situations, the center position of the steering wheel may change.
However, the position will return to normal after the conditions are improved.
● When the steering wheel has been operated quickly or operated for an
extended period of time while the vehicle is stopped or is moving very slowly
● When the steering wheel has been held fully to the left or right
● When the battery is low or the voltage temporarily drops
● After the engine is started at lower than -22°F (-30°C).
2
■ Reduced effectiveness of EPS
CAUTION
■ The ABS does not operate effectively when
● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded.
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on a wet or slick road.
■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating will exceed that of normal condi-
tions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations:
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven roads
■ TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road
surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
217
When driving
The effectiveness of EPS is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when
there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel
may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or
stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The system should return to normal within
10 minutes.
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ If hill-start assist control does not operate effectively
The hill-start assist control may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads
covered in ice.
■ When the VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes and a warning buzzer sounds. Always drive carefully.
Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes and a buzzer sounds.
■ When TRAC and VSC are off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As
these are systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn off TRAC
and VSC unless necessary.
■ Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load
capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire
pressure level.
The ABS and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are fitted on
the vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
■ Handling of tires and suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.
218
2-4. Using other driving systems
Pre-Collision System
Safety systems such as the brakes and seat belts are automatically
engaged to lessen impact and injuries to occupants as well as vehicle damage when the radar sensor detects an unavoidable frontal collision.
■ Pre-collision seat belts
If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the precollision system will retract the seat belt before the collision occurs.
The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or loses
control of the vehicle. (P. 82)
2
When driving
However, the system will not operate in the event of skidding when the
TRAC/VSC systems are disabled.
■ Pre-collision brake assist
Applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is
depressed.
Radar sensor
Detects vehicles or other obstacles on or near the road ahead and
determines whether a collision is
imminent based on the position,
speed, and heading of the obstacles.
■ Obstacles not detected
The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as pylons. There may also be occasions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcycles,
trees, or snowdrifts.
: If equipped
219
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ The pre-collision system is operational when
● Pre-collision seat belts (linked to the radar sensor):
• Vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h).
• The relative speed difference between your vehicle and another vehicle that
is forward of your vehicle, or the speed at your vehicle is approaching an
obstacle is greater than 18 mph (30 km/h).
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
● Pre-collision seat belts (linked to brake operation):
• Vehicle speed exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h).
• The system detects sudden braking or skidding.
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
● Pre-collision brake assist:
• Vehicle speed is above 18 mph (30 km/h).
• The relative speed difference between your vehicle and another vehicle that
is forward of your vehicle, or the speed at your vehicle is approaching an
obstacle is greater than 18 mph (30 km/h).
• The brake pedal is depressed.
■ Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no danger of collision
● When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve
● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve
● When driving over a narrow iron bridge
● When there is a metal object on the road surface
● When driving on an uneven road surface
● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn
● When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front
When the system is activated in the situations described above there is also a possibility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force
greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten it.
■ When there is a malfunction in the system
Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 627, 636)
220
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR002 and HYQDNMWR004
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
221
When driving
Radio frequency radiation exposure Information:
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively:
● Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.
● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the
sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area
inspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille or surrounding area.
● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille.
■ Limitations of the pre-collision system
Do not rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to observe
your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards.
222
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo
capacity and load.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible. Be sure
all items are secured in place.
● Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.
● For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
2
When driving
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400  750 (5150) = 650
lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
223
2-5. Driving information
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is
not designed for trailer towing.
Example based on your vehicle
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity
When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding
in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 825 lb. (375 kg), the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:
825 lb. — 366 lb. = 459 lb. (375 kg —166 kg = 209 kg)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 388 lb.
(176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows:
459 lb. — 388 lb. = 71 lb. (209 kg — 176 kg = 33 kg)
As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases,
the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the
increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an
increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load
capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load),
you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
224
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■ Things that must not be carried in the trunk
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk:
● Receptacles containing gasoline
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
2
get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the pedals from being
depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit the driver or passengers,
causing an accident.
• Driver’s feet
• Front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• Package tray
• Instrument panel
• Dashboard
● Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
● Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total
load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.
225
When driving
● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the item may
2-5. Driving information
Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing
capacity and cargo capacity.
■ Total load capacity:
4-seat models
675 lb (305 kg)
5-seat models
825 lb (375 kg)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and
luggage.
■ Seating capacity:
4-seat models
4 occupants (Front 2, Rear 2)
5-seat models
5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
■ Towing capacity
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
■ Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and
the number of occupants.
■ Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information label.
(P. 573)
226
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■ Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking
ability, resulting in an accident.
2
When driving
227
2-5. Driving information
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the
vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the
prevailing weather conditions.
■ Pre-winter preparations
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
● Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of
battery electrolyte.
● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of
tire chains for the rear tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match
the size of the tires.
■ Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe
away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in
front of the windshield.
● Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.
● Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that
may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes.
228
2-5. Driving information
■ When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable
to road conditions.
■ When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to “P” without setting the
parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from
being released.
Use the correct snow chain size when mounting the snow chains. Chain
size is regulated for each tire size.
Side chain
(0.12 in. [3 mm] in diameter)
Cross chain
(0.16 in. [4 mm] in diameter)
Regulations on the use of snow chains
● Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location
and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing
chains.
● Install the chains on the rear tires.
● Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
229
When driving
Selecting snow chains
2
2-5. Driving information
■ Snow chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the rear tires only. Do not install tire chains on front tires.
● Install the tire chains on rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after
driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying
instructions.
CAUTION
■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious
injury.
● Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.
● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires
being used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
■ Driving with snow chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may
cause death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used,
or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle
handling.
● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is
maintained.
230
2-5. Driving information
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs and obtain replacement of snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of
the tire air pressure sensor.
■ Fitting tire chains
The tire air pressure sensor may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.
2
When driving
231
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also
does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch
carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your Lexus is not designed
for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.
232
2-5. Driving information
Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the
ground) behind a motor home.
2
When driving
NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.
233
3-1. Using the touch screen
Touch screen............................ 236
Setting the touch screen...... 239
3-2. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Front air conditioning system
(without touch screen)....... 244
Front air conditioning system
(touch screen without rear
air conditioning system) .... 253
Front air conditioning system
(touch screen with rear
air conditioning system) .... 262
Rear air conditioning
system ..................................... 272
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror
defoggers .............................. 279
Windshield wiper de-icer ... 280
3-3. Using the audio system
Audio system
(without touch screen)...... 282
Using the radio....................... 284
Using the CD player ............ 288
Playing back MP3 and
WMA discs............................ 294
Optimal use of the
audio system ........................ 300
Using the AUX adapter...... 302
Using the steering wheel
audio switches ..................... 303
234
Audio system
(touch screen without
navigation system).............. 305
Using the radio ....................... 308
Using the CD player.............. 313
Playing MP3 and
WMA discs ............................ 321
Using the DVD player .......... 328
Playing DVD video/audio..... 331
Playing a video CD................ 344
DVD player and DVD
video disc information ....... 348
Optimal use of the
audio/video system............. 352
Using the AUX adapter....... 356
Using the rear seat
audio controls ...................... 357
Using the steering wheel
audio switches....................... 361
3-4. Using the rear seat
entertainment system
Rear seat entertainment
system features.................... 363
Using the radio ....................... 372
Using the front
DVD player........................... 373
Using the rear
DVD player............................ 374
Playing an audio
CD/CD text........................... 376
Playing WMA
(front DVD player only)/
MP3 discs .............................. 377
Interior features
Playing the HDD audio ........ 378
Playing a DVD
video/audio............................ 379
Playing a video CD ................ 392
DVD player and DVD
video disc information ....... 396
Using the video mode.......... 405
Changing other setting ........ 407
3-5. Using the hands-free system
(for cellular phone)
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone) ............. 409
Using the Bluetooth®
phone ....................................... 414
Setting the hands-free
system ..................................... 427
3-6. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list..................... 453
• Interior lights ........................ 454
• Personal lights...................... 454
3-7. Using the storage features
List of storage features......... 456
• Glove box .............................. 459
• Coin holder ........................... 460
• Door pockets......................... 461
• Cup holders .......................... 462
• Console box.......................... 464
• Cool box/auxiliary box...... 466
• Auxiliary boxes .................... 470
3
3-8. Other interior features
Sun visors ................................. 472
Vanity mirror ........................... 473
Clock.......................................... 474
Outside temperature
display...................................... 476
Ashtrays..................................... 477
Cigarette lighter.................... 478
Power outlets .......................... 480
Heated steering wheel ........ 482
Climate control seats/
seat heaters .......................... 484
Armrest .................................... 488
Rear seat relaxation
system..................................... 489
Retractable table.................... 491
Rear sunshade ........................ 493
Rear door sunshades ............ 496
Trunk storage extension ...... 499
Coat hooks ............................... 501
Floor mat .................................. 502
Trunk features......................... 503
Garage door opener ............ 506
Compass ................................... 512
Lexus Link System .................. 516
235
3-1. Using the touch screen
Touch screen (without navigation system)
By touching the screen with your finger, you can control the audio system
and air conditioning, and adjust the screen display, etc.
Press
to display the “Information” screen.
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the
“Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
236
3-1. Using the touch screen
Button/switch
Page
P. 253, 262
“AUDIO”
P. 305
“INFO” (Displaying the “Information” screen)
P. 236
“DISP” (Adjusting the display)
P. 239
“Telephone”
P. 414
“LEXUS Park Assist”
P. 199
“Screen Setting”
P. 241
“Beep Off”
P. 239
“Adjust Clock”
P. 474
3
Interior features
“CLIMATE”
The initial screen
If the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
is set to ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode, the initial screen will be
displayed for a few seconds as the
system starts up.
237
3-1. Using the touch screen
■ To avoid damaging the touch screen
● Touch the screen lightly with your finger. If there is no response, remove your fin-
ger from the screen and try again.
● Remove any dirt on the screen by wiping with a soft cloth. Do not use detergent.
■ When using the touch screen
● If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to be
operating slightly slower than normal.
● The screen may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sunglasses.
Change your angle of viewing, adjust the display on the “Display” screen, or
remove your sunglasses.
238
3-1. Using the touch screen
Setting the touch screen
You can change the touch screen to your desired settings.
Turning off the beep sound
The beep that sounds when a touch screen button is touched can be
turned off.
STEP 1
Press
.
Touch
STEP 2
.
3
Interior features
Adjusting the display
STEP 1
Press
.
STEP 2
Adjust the display as desired using
/
and
/
.
If you do not touch the screen for 20 seconds, the system will return to
the previous screen.
With CD mode
239
3-1. Using the touch screen
With DVD mode
“Color”
Red
Green
“Tone”
Lighter
Darker
“Contrast”
Weaker
Stronger
“Brightness”
Darker
Brighter
■ “Day Mode”
When the headlights are turned on, the
screen dims. However, the screen can be
switched to “Day Mode”.
The screen will stay in “Day Mode” when
the headlights are turned on until
touched again.
is
■ To turn off the picture display
If
240
is touched, the screen display is turned off, and guidance is by voice only.
3-1. Using the touch screen
■ Opening or closing the rear display (if equipped)
Touching
play.
opens or closes the rear dis-
Screen settings
The following screen settings can be changed:
3
Automatic transition
Switch color
You can select the switch color.
Rear system lock (if equipped)
The operation lock on the rear seat
entertainment system can be
turned on or off.
Personal data deletion
The following personal data is
deleted:
• User selection settings
• Phone book data
• Dialed numbers and received
calls
• Speed dial
• Bluetooth® phone data
• Security code
241
Interior features
20 seconds after audio system use,
the system will return the display to
the previous screen.
3-1. Using the touch screen
■ Setting automatic transition
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
or
on the “Screen Setting” screen.
.
■ Setting the switch color
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
or
on the “Screen Setting” screen.
.
■ Setting the rear system lock
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
242
.
on the “Information” screen.
or
.
on the “Screen Setting” screen.
3-1. Using the touch screen
■ To delete personal data
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
Touch
STEP 3
STEP 4
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Screen Setting” screen.
Touch
.
Check carefully beforehand, as
data cannot be retrieved once
deleted.
3
Interior features
■ When deleting personal data
Data can only be deleted when the vehicle is stopped.
■ When selling the vehicle
Be sure to delete both the call history and personal data.
■ If you touch
The display returns to the previous screen.
243
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Front air conditioning system (without touch screen)
Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
Driver’s side temperature
setting display
Fan speed
Automatic mode
Driver's side
temperature
control
Fan speed display
Airflow display
Changes the air outlets used
Passenger’s side temperature
setting display
Passenger’s side
temperature control
Off
Dual operation button
Windshield defogger
Micro dust and pollen filter
Air conditioning on/off button
Outside air or recirculated air mode
Using the automatic mode
STEP 1
Press
.
The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets
and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
STEP 2
Press
to switch to automatic air intake mode.
The air conditioning system automatically switches between
outside air and recirculated air modes.
244
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
STEP 3
Press  on
 to increase the temperature and  to
decrease the temperature.
The temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be set separately.
Adjusting the settings
■ Adjusting the temperature setting
Press  on
to increase the temperature and  to decrease the
modes each time
is pressed.
Dual mode (the indicator on
is on.): The temperature for the
left-hand seat and right-hand seat can be adjusted separately. Operating the passenger’s side temperature control will enter dual mode.
Simultaneous mode (the indicator on
is off.): Only
(driver’s side) can be used to adjust the temperature for all seats.
■ Adjusting the fan speed
Press  (increase) or  (decrease) on
Press
.
to turn the fan off.
245
Interior features
temperature.
The air conditioning system switches between dual and simultaneous
3
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Changing the air outlets
Press
.
The air outlets switch each time the
button is pressed.
Air flows as shown below according to the mode selected.
Upper body
Upper body and feet
246
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Feet
Feet and front windshield
3
Interior features
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press
.
The mode switches between
(recycles air inside the vehicle), “AUTO”
and
(introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each time the
button is pressed.
When the air intake control system is switched to automatic mode, it operates automatically.
247
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Defogging the front windshield
Press
.
The air conditioning system control
operates automatically.
Micro dust and pollen filter
Press
.
Outside air mode switches to
(recirculated air) mode. Pollen is removed from the air and the
air flows to the upper part of the
body.
Usually the system will turn off
automatically after approximately
3 minutes.
To stop the operation, press
again.
248
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the sensitivity of the air intake control in automatic mode
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
seconds.
for 2 or more
Press  (increase) or  (decrease)
3
.
From —3 (low) to 3 (high) can be
set.
Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets
Front center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
249
Interior features
on
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Front side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
Rear center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
Rear side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
250
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Using the automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and
ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur:
● Immediately after
is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or
cool air is ready to flow.
● Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on.
■ Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an
extended period.
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched to in
accordance with the temperature setting and the inside temperature.
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to
ations where the windows need to be defogged.
(outside air) mode in situ-
■ When outside temperature approaches 32F (0C)
The air conditioning system may not operate even when
is pressed.
■ Automatic mode for air intake control
In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
■ Micro dust and pollen filter
● In order to prevent the windows from fogging up when the outside air is cold,
the following may occur:
• Outside air mode does not switch to
.
• The air conditioning system operates automatically.
• The operation cancels after 1 minute.
● In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press
.
251
Interior features
■ Window defogger feature
3
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
CAUTION
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use
during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can
cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
NOTICE
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine
is off.
252
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Front air conditioning system (touch screen without rear air conditioning system)
Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
Press
to display the air conditioning operation screen.
Air conditioning operation
screen display button
Airflow display
3
Driver’s side
temperature control
Passenger's side
temperature control
Dual operation button
Outside air or
recirculated air mode
Automatic mode
Driver’s side temperature
display
Off
Windshield defogger
Passenger’s side
temperature display
Micro dust and pollen filter
The above illustration is for a vehicle equipped with the navigation system. The position of
may differ slightly for vehicles not
equipped with the navigation system.
253
Interior features
Fan speed display
Air conditioning
on/off switch
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Using the speech command system (if equipped)
Pull
to operate the speech
command system. (“Navigation
System Owner’s Manual”)
Using the automatic mode
STEP 1
Press
.
The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets
and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
STEP 2
Press
to switch to automatic air intake mode.
The air conditioning system automatically switches between
outside air and recirculated air modes.
STEP 3
Press  on
to increase the temperature and  to decrease
the temperature.
The temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be set separately.
254
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the settings
■ Adjusting the temperature setting
Press  on
to increase the temperature and  to decrease the
temperature.
The air conditioning system switches between dual and simultaneous
modes each time
is pressed.
Dual mode (the indicator on
is on.): The temperature for the lefthand seat and right-hand seat can be adjusted separately. Operating
the passenger's side temperature control will enter dual mode.
is off.): Only
(driver’s
side) can used to adjust the temperature for all seats.
■ Adjusting the fan speed
Touch any switch of
operation screen.
Press
(decrease increase) on the
to turn the fan off.
■ Changing the air outlets
Touch any mode on the operation
screen.
255
Interior features
Simultaneous mode (the indicator on
3
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Air flows as shown below according to the mode selected.
Upper body
Upper body and feet
Feet
Feet and front windshield
256
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press
.
The mode switches between
(recycles air inside the vehicle), “AUTO”
and
(introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each time the
button is pressed.
When the air intake control system is switched to automatic mode, it operates automatically.
Defogging the windshield
Press
.
The air conditioning system control
operates automatically.
3
Interior features
Micro dust and pollen filter
Press
.
Outside air mode switches to
(recirculated air) mode. Pollen is removed from the air and the
air flows to the upper part of the
body.
Usually the system will turn off
automatically after approximately
3 minutes.
To stop the operation, press
again.
257
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the sensitivity of the air intake control in automatic mode
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
until the “Smog Sensor” screen appears while the
vehicle is stopped.
Touch
any
switch
of
(lower sensitivity  higher sensitivity) on the
operation screen.
Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets
Front center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
Front side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
258
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
Rear side outlets
■ Using the automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and
ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur:
● The system may switch automatically to recirculated mode when the coolest
temperature setting is selected in summer.
● Immediately after
is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or
cool air is ready to flow.
● Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on.
259
3
Interior features
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an
extended period.
■ Window defogger feature
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to
ations where the windows need to be defogged.
(outside air) mode in situ-
■ When outside temperature approaches 32F (0C)
The air conditioning system may not operate even when
is touched.
■ Automatic mode for air intake control
In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
When the air conditioning is off, and the fan is operating, turning the “AUTO” mode
on will activate the air conditioning system.
■ Micro dust and pollen filter
● In order to prevent the windows from fogging up when the outside air is cold,
the following may occur:
• Outside air mode does not switch to
.
• The air conditioning system operates automatically.
• The operation cancels after 1 minute.
● In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press
.
260
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
CAUTION
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The differDo not use
ence between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can
cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
NOTICE
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine
is off.
3
Interior features
261
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Front air conditioning system (touch screen with rear air conditioning system)
Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
Press
to display the air conditioning operation screen.
Air conditioning operation
screen display button
Airflow display
Rear air conditioning operation screen display switch
Fan speed display
Air conditioning
on/off switch
Air purifier
and rear air
conditioning
operation switch
Driver's side
temperature control
4-zone operation button
Automatic mode
Driver’s side
temperature display
Passenger’s side
temperature control
Off
Windshield
defogger
Outside air or recirculated air mode
Passenger’s side
temperature
display
Micro dust and pollen filter
The above illustration is for a vehicle equipped with the navigation system. The position of
may differ slightly for vehicles not
equipped with the navigation system.
262
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Using the speech command system (if equipped)
Pull
to operate the speech
command system. ( “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”)
Using the automatic mode
STEP 1
Press
3
.
STEP 2
Press
to switch to automatic air intake mode.
The air conditioning system automatically switches between
outside air and recirculated air modes.
STEP 3
Press  on
to increase the temperature and  to decrease
the temperature.
Air outlets and fan speed for the right-hand and left-hand seats may be
set separately depending on the temperature setting.
263
Interior features
The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets
and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the settings
■ Adjusting the temperature setting
Press  on
to increase the temperature and  to decrease the
temperature.
The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous modes each time
is pressed.
Individual mode (the indicator on
is on.): The temperature for the
driver’s, front passenger’s and rear seats (P. 272) can be adjusted
separately. Operating the passenger's side temperature control will
enter individual mode.
Simultaneous mode (the indicator on
is off.): Only
(driver’s
side) can be used to adjust the temperature for all seats.
■ Adjusting the fan speed
Touch any switch of
operation screen.
Press
(decrease increase) on the
to turn the fan off.
■ Changing the air outlets
Touch any mode on the operation
screen.
L: Left-hand front seat
R: Right-hand front seat
Different air outlets for the lefthand and right-hand front seats can
be chosen.
264
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Air flows as shown below according to the mode selected.
Upper body
Upper body and feet
3
Interior features
Feet
Feet and front windshield
265
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press
.
The mode switches between
(recycles air inside the vehicle), “AUTO”
and
(introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each time the
button is pressed.
When the air intake control system is switched to automatic mode, it operates automatically.
Turning the air purifier off
Touch
on the operation screen.
The air purifier will turn off when the indicator on the switch goes off. Air will
not flow from the roof vents.
To turn the air purifier on, touch
266
again.
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Changing the rear seat settings
■ Adjusting the temperature setting
STEP 1 Touch
.
Touch
 (increase) or
(decrease) on the operation
screen. Operating the switch will
enter individual mode.
STEP 2
L: Left-hand rear seat
R: Right-hand rear seat
■ Adjusting the fan speed (air purifier and cooler from the roof vents)
STEP 1 Touch
.
STEP 2
Touch any switch of
the operation screen.
(decrease increase) on
According to the air outlets currently selected, the fan speed of either
the cool air from the roof vents or air purifier will be adjusted.
(P. 275)
Press
to turn the fan off.
267
3
Interior features
The air conditioning system
switches between individual and
simultaneous modes each time
is pressed.
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Defogging the windshield
Press
.
The air conditioning system control
operates automatically.
Micro dust and pollen filter
Press
.
Outside air mode switches to
(recirculated air) mode. Pollen is removed from the air and the
air flows to the upper part of the
body.
Usually the system will turn off
automatically after approximately
3 minutes.
To stop the operation, press
again.
268
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the sensitivity of the air intake control in automatic mode
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
until the “Smog Sensor” screen appears while the
vehicle is stopped.
Touch
any
switch
of
(lower sensitivity  higher sensitivity) on the
operation screen.
3
Front center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
269
Interior features
Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Front side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
Air outlets of the rear seat
P. 276
■ Using the automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and
ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur:
● The system may switch automatically to recirculated mode when the coolest
temperature setting is selected in summer.
● Immediately after
is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or
cool air is ready to flow.
● Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on.
■ Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an
extended period.
■ Window defogger feature
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to
ations where the windows need to be defogged.
■ When outside temperature approaches 32F (0C)
The air conditioning system may not operate even when
270
(outside air) mode in situ-
is touched.
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Automatic mode for air intake control
In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
When the air conditioning is off, and the fan is operating, turning the “AUTO” mode
on will activate the air conditioning system.
■ Micro dust and pollen filter
● In order to prevent the windows from fogging up when the outside air is cold,
the following may occur:
• Outside air mode does not switch to
.
• The air conditioning system operates automatically.
• The operation cancels after 1 minute.
● In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press
.
■ Air purifier
3
The air purifier will turn on when turning the rear air conditioning system on.
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use
during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can
cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
NOTICE
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine
is off.
271
Interior features
CAUTION
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear air conditioning system
Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
5-seat models
Off
Automatic mode
Left side temperature display
Left side airflow display
Air volume display
Right side airflow display
Right side temperature display
Air volume
Left side
temperature control
Changes the left side air outlet used
Right side
temperature control
Changes the right side air outlet used
: If equipped
272
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
4-seat models
Automatic mode
Off
Air volume
Changes the
left side air
outlets used
Changes the
right side air
outlets used
Left side
temperature
control
Right side
temperature
control
3
Left side temperature display
Right side temperature display
Air volume display
Interior features
Left side airflow display
Right side airflow display
Using the automatic mode
STEP 1
Press
.
The air conditioning system and air purifier will operate, and
air outlets and fan speed will be set automatically.
“AUTO” will be displayed on the control panel.
STEP 2
Press  on
to increase the temperature and  to decrease
the temperature.
Air outlets and fan speed for the right-hand and left-hand seats may be
set separately depending on the temperature setting.
273
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the settings
■ Adjusting the temperature setting
Press  on
to increase the temperature and  to decrease the
temperature.
Air outlets and fan speed for the right-hand and left-hand seats may be
set separately depending on the temperature setting.
■ Changing the air outlets
Press
.
The air outlets change as follows each time
is pressed.
Different air outlets for the right-hand and left-hand rear seats can be chosen.
Air flows as shown below according to the mode selected.
Upper body
When the indicator on
(on
the front operation screen) is on
*: Cool air only
Upper body
When the indicator on
(on
the front operation screen) is off
274
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Upper body and feet
Feet
3
Press  (increase) or  (decrease) on
.
Cool air flows from roof vents.
275
Interior features
■ Adjusting the air volume
The volume of cool air or air from the air purifier can be adjusted
according to the mode selected.
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Air purifier operation (air flows
from the rear package tray.)
Press
to turn the fan off.
Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets
Rear center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
Rear side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
276
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Roof side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
■ Button lock function
5-seat models
3
To prevent inadvertent operation, the buttons
Pressing
again until you hear a beep will
release the lock.
The indicator appears on the display when
the buttons are locked.
4-seat models
277
Interior features
on the rear armrest can be locked. Press
until you hear a beep to lock the buttons.
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Rear control panel illumination off function
5-seat models
Control panel illumination on the rear armrest can be turned off. Press
until you
hear a beep to turn the illumination off. Pressing
again until you hear a beep will
turn the illumination on.
4-seat models
■ Replacing the rear air conditioning filter
Replacing the air filter when using rear air conditioning or air purifier reduces air
flow or deodorizing performance. (P. 579).
NOTICE
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine
is off.
278
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
Vehicles without touch screen
On/off
Press the button to turn on the
rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers. The
defoggers will automatically
turn off after approximately 15
minutes. Pressing the button
again also turns the defoggers
off.
3
Vehicles with touch screen
Interior features
CAUTION
■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on
Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirrors, as they can become very
hot and burn you.
279
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Windshield wiper de-icer
This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and
wiper blades.
Vehicles without touch screen
On/off
Press the button to turn on the
windshield wiper de-icer. The
windshield wiper de-icer will
automatically turn off after
approximately 15 minutes.
Pressing the button again also
turns the de-icer off.
Vehicles with touch screen (without navigation system)
STEP 1
Press
to display the air
conditioning operation screen.
STEP 2
On/off
Touch the switch to turn on the
windshield wiper de-icer. The
windshield wiper de-icer will
automatically turn off after
approximately 15 minutes.
Touching the switch again also
turns the de-icer off.
: If equipped
280
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Vehicles with touch screen (with navigation system)
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
to display the air
conditioning operation screen.
On/off
Touch the switch to turn on the
windshield wiper de-icer. The
windshield wiper de-icer will
automatically turn off after
approximately 15 minutes.
Touching the switch again also
turns the de-icer off.
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■ When the windshield wiper de-icer is on
Do not touch the glass at the lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front
pillars as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you.
281
3-3. Using the audio system
Audio system (without touch screen)
CD player with changer and AM/FM radio
Title
Page
Using the radio
P. 284
Using the CD player
P. 288
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs
P. 294
Optimal use of the audio system
P. 300
Using the AUX adapter
P. 302
Using the steering wheel audio switches
P. 303
■ Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is
being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.
282
3-3. Using the audio system
CAUTION
■ For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Canada
● Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s
authority to operate this device.
● Laser products
NOTICE
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the engine off.
■ To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids on the audio system.
283
3
Interior features
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes by yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the
surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain
inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any
of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
3-3. Using the audio system
Using the radio
Station
selector
Displays radio text messages
Changing the
program types
Seeking any traffic
program station
Adjusting the
frequency
Power Volume
AM/FM
mode buttons
Seeking the frequency
284
Scanning for receivable stations
3-3. Using the audio system
Setting station presets
STEP 1
or pressing  or  on
Search for desired stations by turning
.
STEP 2
Press and hold the button (from
be set to, and you will hear a beep.
to
) the station is to
Scanning radio stations
■ Scanning the preset radio stations
STEP 1 Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
3
When the desired station is reached, press
■ Scanning all radio stations within range
STEP 1 Press
.
STEP 2
Interior features
Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
once again.
All stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.
STEP 2
When the desired station is reached, press
once again.
285
3-3. Using the audio system
RDS (Radio Data System)
This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information
and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which
broadcast this information.
■ Receiving RDS broadcasts
STEP 1
Press  or  on
during FM reception.
The type of program changes each time the button is pressed.
● “ROCK”
● “EASYLIS” (Easy listening)
● “CLS/JAZZ” (Classical music and Jazz)
● “R & B” (Rhythm and Blues)
● “INFORM” (Information)
● “RELIGION”
● “MISC” (Miscellaneous)
● “ALERT” (Emergency messages)
If the system receives no RDS stations, “NO PTY” appears on the display.
STEP 2
Press
, or  or  on
.
The radio seeks or scans for stations by the relevant program type.
286
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Displaying radio station names
Press
.
■ Displaying radio text messages
Press
twice.
If “MSG” shows in the display, a text message will be displayed.
If the text continues past the end of the display,
hold
is displayed. Press and
until you hear a beep.
■ When the battery is disconnected
3
Stations presets are erased.
● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually
changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding
objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
● The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear radio
reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the
antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.
287
Interior features
■ Reception sensitivity
3-3. Using the audio system
Using the CD player
Repeat play
Reverse
Random
playback
Fast forward
Displays text
message
Disc slot
Disc eject
Disc load
Disc change
Power Volume
Search playback
Track selection
Playback
Loading discs
■ Loading a disc
STEP 1 Press
.
“WAIT” is shown on the display.
STEP 2
Insert a disc when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to
green.
The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.
■ Loading multiple discs
STEP 1 Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
“WAIT” is shown on the display.
STEP 2
Insert a disc when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to
green.
The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.
The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the disc is inserted.
288
3-3. Using the audio system
STEP 3
Insert the next disc when the indicator on the slot turns from
amber to green again.
Repeat the procedure for the remaining discs.
To stop the operation, press
.
Ejecting discs
■ Ejecting a disc
STEP 1
To select the disc to be ejected,
press  or  on
.
The number of the disc selected is
shown on the display.
Interior features
Press
and remove the disc.
■ Ejecting all discs
Press and hold
until you hear a beep, then remove the disc.
STEP 2
Selecting, fast-forwarding, and scanning tracks
■ Selecting a track
Press  to move up and  to move down using
until the desired
track number is displayed.
To fast forward or rewind, press and hold  or  on
3
.
289
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Scanning a disc
STEP 1 Press
.
The first ten seconds of each track will be played.
STEP 2
Press the switch again when the desired track is reached.
Selecting a disc
■ Selecting a disc to play
To select the desired disc, press  or  on
■ Scanning loaded discs
STEP 1 Press and hold
.
until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first track on each disc will be played.
STEP 2
Press the switch again when the desired disc is reached.
Random playback
■ Current disc
Press
(RAND).
Songs are played in random order until random playback is canceled.
■ All discs
Press and hold
(RAND) until you hear a beep.
Tracks on all loaded discs are played in a random order until the button is
pressed once more.
Repeating a track or a disc
■ Repeating a Track
Press
(RPT).
■ Repeating a disc
Press and hold
290
(RPT) until you hear a beep.
3-3. Using the audio system
Switching the display
Press
.
Each time the switch is pressed, the display changes in the order of Track no./
Elapsed time  Disc title  Track name.
■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Press
(RAND),
(RPT) or
again.
■ When “LOAD”, “ERROR” or “WAIT” is shown on the display
“LOAD”:
This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the disc.
“ERROR”: Make sure the label of the displayed disc is facing up, and then reinsert
it in the player.
Operation has stopped due to a high temperature inside the player.
Wait for a while and then press
. Contact your Lexus dealer if the
disc still cannot be played back.
■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or
due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protection features may not play correctly.
■ CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected.
■ If discs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-
ods
Discs may be damaged and may not play properly.
■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
291
Interior features
“WAIT”:
3
3-3. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs or 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.
● CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.
(12 cm).
● Low-quality or deformed CDs.
● CDs with a transparent or translucent
recording area.
● CDs that have tape, stickers or CD-R
labels attached to them, or that have had
the label peeled off.
292
3-3. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■ CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the CDs or
the player itself.
● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
● Do not apply oil to the CD player.
● Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
● Do not insert more than one CD at a time.
3
Interior features
293
3-3. Using the audio system
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs
Repeat play
Random playback
Reverse
Fast forward
Displays text
message
Selecting
a folder
Disc slot
Disc eject
Disc load
File selection
Disc selection
Power Volume
Search playback
File selection
Playback
Loading, ejecting and selecting MP3 and WMA discs
P. 288
Selecting a folder
■ Selecting folders one at a time
Press  or on
to select the desired folder.
■ Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder
Press and hold
until you hear a beep. When the desired folder is
reached, press the switch once again.
294
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Returning to the first folder
Press and hold on
until you hear a beep.
Selecting and scanning files
■ Selecting one file at a time
Turn
or press  or  on
to select the desired file.
■ Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder
Press
.
3
Interior features
When the desired file is reached, press the switch once again.
Repeat play
■ Repeating a file
Press
(RPT).
■ Repeating all of the files in a folder
Press and hold
(RPT) until you hear a beep.
Random playback
■ Playing files from a particular folder in random order
Press
(RAND).
■ Playing all the files on a disc in random order
Press and hold
(RAND) until you hear a beep.
295
3-3. Using the audio system
Switching the display
Press
.
Each time the switch is pressed, the display changes in the order of the Folder
no./File no./Elapsed time  Folder name  File name  Album title (MP3
only)  Track title  Artist name.
■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Press
(RAND),
(RPT) or
again.
■ When “LOAD”, “ERROR” or “WAIT” is shown on the display.
“LOAD”:
This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the disc.
“ERROR”: Make sure the label of the displayed disc is facing up, and then reinsert
it in the player.
“WAIT”:
Operation has stopped due to a high temperature inside the player.
Wait for a while and then press
. Contact your Lexus dealer if the
disc still cannot be played back.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that MP3 or WMA files are not present on the disc.
■ CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
■ If discs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-
ods
Discs may be damaged and may not play properly.
■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
296
3-3. Using the audio system
■ MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media TMAudio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the
media/formats on which the files are recorded.
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
● WMA file compatibility
3
Interior features
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
● Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is not
finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is
scratched or marked with fingerprints.
297
3-3. Using the audio system
● Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may
not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root)
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● Discs containing multi-session recordings
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs
that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title,
artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The
number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
298
3-3. Using the audio system
● MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first
checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To
make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any
files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot
be played.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This
may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
● Playback
NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used (P. 292)
■ CD player precautions (P. 293)
299
3
Interior features
• To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of
at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3
and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding
and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may
result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take
more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be
possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
3-3. Using the audio system
Optimal use of the audio system
Adjusting the
sound quality
Changing
the listening
position
Adjusting the ASL
Changing the sound quality modes
Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
Press
.
The ASL switches between on and off modes each time the switch is
pressed.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the noise
level as you drive your vehicle.
Changing the listening position
The sound feel setting can be changed to produce the best sound for
each listening position.
Press
(position selector) to change the setting.
The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed.
300
3-3. Using the audio system
Display
Listening position
“DRIVER”
Position best suited to the driver’s seat
“FRONT”
Position best suited to the driver’s and front passenger’s
seats
“REAR”
Position best suited to the rear seats
“ALL”
Position best suited to all seats
Adjusting sound quality and volume balance
■ Changing sound quality modes
3
Press
.
Pressing the button changes the sound mode in the following order.
Interior features
“BAS”“MID”“TRE”“FAd”“BAL”
■ Adjusting sound quality
Press
or
to adjust the level.
Sound quality mode
Mode
displayed
Level
Bass*
“BAS”
-5 to 5
Mid-range*
“MID”
-5 to 5
Treble*
“TRE”
-5 to 5
Front/rear
volume
balance
“FAd”
Left/right
volume
balance
“BAL”
Press 
Press 
Low
High
F7 to R7
Shifts to rear
Shifts to front
L7 to R7
Shifts to left
Shifts to right
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each AMFM or CD mode.
301
3-3. Using the audio system
Using the AUX adapter
This adapter can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it
through the vehicle’s speakers.
Connect the portable audio
device.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
.
■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio
device.
302
3-3. Using the audio system
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering
wheel.
Turns the power on, selects
audio source
Volume
Radio mode: Selects radio
stations
CD mode: Selects
tracks,
files (MP3 and
WMA) and discs
3
Press
when the audio system is turned off.
The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down for 1 second
or more.
Changing the audio source
Press
when the audio system is turned on. The audio source
changes as follows each time the switch is pressed. If no discs are inserted
in the player, that mode will be skipped.
FM1FM2CD playerAUXAMFM1
303
Interior features
Turning on the power
3-3. Using the audio system
Adjusting the volume
Pull
to increase the volume and
to decrease the volume.
Hold up the switch to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
Selecting a radio station
STEP 1
Press
to select the radio mode.
STEP 2
Press or  on
to select a radio station.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold  or  on the switch until
you hear a beep.
Selecting a track/file
STEP 1
Press
to select the CD mode.
STEP 2
Press  or  on
to select the desired track/file.
Selecting a disc in the CD player
STEP 1
Press
to select the CD mode.
STEP 2
Press and hold  or  on
until a beep is heard.
■ Canceling automatic selection of a radio station
Press the same switch.
CAUTION
■ To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
304
3-3. Using the audio system
Audio system (touch screen without navigation system)
CD and (optional) DVD player with changer, and AM/FM radio
Press
to display the audio operation screen.
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to
the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
3
Interior features
The audio system appearance and screen may differ slightly for vehicles not equipped with the DVD player.
305
3-3. Using the audio system
CD player:
Plays audio CDs, CD text, MP3 discs and WMA discs.
DVD player:
Plays audio CDs, CD text, video CDs, MP3 discs,
WMA discs, DVD video discs and DVD audio discs.
Title
Page
Using the radio
P. 308
Using the CD player
P. 313
Playing MP3 and WMA discs
P. 321
Using the DVD player
P. 328
Playing DVD video/audio
P. 331
Playing a video CD
P. 344
DVD player and DVD video disc
information
P. 348
Optimal use of the audio/video system
P. 352
Using the AUX adapter
P. 356
Using the rear seat audio controls
P. 357
Using the steering wheel audio switches
P. 361
■ Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is
being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.
306
3-3. Using the audio system
CAUTION
■ For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Canada
● Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s
authority to operate this device.
● Laser products
NOTICE
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the engine off.
■ To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids on the audio system.
307
3
Interior features
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes by yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the
surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain
inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any
of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
3-3. Using the audio system
Using the radio
Press
or
to choose either an AM or FM band.
Audio control screen display button
Preset stations
Scanning for
receivable
stations
Power
Volume
Adjusting the
frequency
Seeking the frequency
Preset tuning
Scan for receivable stations
AM/FM mode buttons
This illustration is for a vehicle equipped with the DVD player.
308
3-3. Using the audio system
Setting station presets
STEP 1
Search for desired stations by turning
 or  on
STEP 2
or pressing
.
Touch and hold one of the preset stations (1 - 6) until you hear a
beep.
Scanning radio stations
3
until “PSCAN” appears.
Preset stations will be played for a few seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, touch
once again.
FM station
STEP 1 Press
until “PSCAN” appears.
STEP 2 When the desired station is reached, press
STEP 2
or press
once again.
309
Interior features
■ Scanning the preset radio stations
AM station
STEP 1 Touch
on the screen or press
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Scanning all radio stations within range
AM station
STEP 1 Touch
on the screen or press
.
“SCAN” appears on the screen and all stations within range will be
played for a few seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, touch
once again.
FM station
STEP 1 Press
.
or press
STEP 2
“SCAN” appears on the screen and all stations within range will be
played for a few seconds each.
STEP 2
When the desired station is reached, press
once again.
RDS (Radio Data System)
This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information
and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which
broadcast this information.
■ Receiving RDS broadcasts
STEP 1
310
Touch
screen.
or
on the
3-3. Using the audio system
The type of program changes each time the button is pressed.
● “ROCK”
● “EASYLIS” (Easy listening)
● “CLS/JAZZ” (Classical music and Jazz)
● “R & B” (Rhythm and Blues)
● “INFORM” (Information)
● “RELIGION”
● “MISC” (Miscellaneous)
● “ALARM” (Emergency messages)
3
If the system receives no RDS stations, “NO PTY” appears on the display.
STEP 2
Touch
on the screen or press  or  on
Interior features
When a program is set, “TYPE SEEK” appears.
.
The radio seeks or scans for stations by the relevant program type.
If no radio station of that type is found, “NOTHING” appears on the
screen.
■ Displaying radio text messages
Touch
on the screen.
If “MSG” appears on the screen, a
text message may be displayed.
When
play returns.
you
touch
, the dis-
311
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Traffic announcement
Touch
on the screen.
“TRAF SEEK” appears on the display, and the radio will start seeking
any station broadcasting traffic
program information.
If no traffic program station is
found, “NOTHING” appears on
the display.
■ When the battery is disconnected
All preset stations are erased.
■ Reception sensitivity
● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually
changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding
objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
● The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear radio
reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the
antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.
312
3-3. Using the audio system
Using the CD player
Insert a disc or press
with a disc inserted.
Audio control screen display button
Display track list
Disc selection
Search playback
Repeat play
3
Random playback
Disc eject
Power Volume
Interior features
Disc slot
Disc load
Disc change
Track selection
Playback
This illustration is for a vehicle equipped with the DVD player.
313
3-3. Using the audio system
Loading discs
■ Loading a single disc
STEP 1 Press
.
STEP 2 When the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, insert
a disc after the disc slot door opens.
■ Loading multiple discs
STEP 1 Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
STEP 2 When the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, insert
a disc after the disc slot door opens.
STEP 3 After inserting a disc, wait until the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, then insert the next disc after the disc slot
door has opened.
STEP 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have inserted all discs.
To cancel the operation, press the
or
button. If you do not
insert a disc within 15 seconds, loading will be canceled automatically.
Ejecting discs
■ Ejecting a disc
STEP 1 To select the disc to be ejected, touch the desired disc on the
screen or press  or  on
STEP 2
Press
and remove the disc.
■ Ejecting all discs
Press and hold
314
.
until you hear a beep, then remove the disc.
3-3. Using the audio system
Selecting, fast forwarding and scanning tracks
■ Selecting a track
Press  to move up and  to move down using
until the desired
track number appears on the screen.
To fast forward or rewind, press and hold  or  on
.
■ Selecting a track from the track list
STEP 1 Touch
on the screen.
Touch the desired track number.
STEP 2
: changes the list by 6
track groups
This function is available only when
the vehicle is not moving.
■ Scanning a disc
STEP 1 Touch
on the screen.
“SCAN” appears on the screen.
The first 10 seconds of each track will be played.
STEP 2
Touch
once again when the desired track is reached.
315
Interior features
or
3
3-3. Using the audio system
Selecting a disc
■ Selecting a disc to play
Touch the desired disc on the screen or press  or  on
.
(P. 313)
■ Scanning loaded discs
STEP 1 Touch and hold
on the screen until “DSCAN” appears.
The first 10 seconds of the first track on each disc will be played.
STEP 2
Touch
once again when the desired disc is reached.
Random playback
■ Current disc
Touch
on the screen.
Songs are played in random order.
■ All discs
Touch and hold
on the screen until “DRAND” appears.
Tracks on all loaded discs are played in random order.
Repeating a track or a disc
■ Repeating a track
Touch
on the screen.
■ Repeating a disc
Touch
on the screen and hold until “DRPT” appears.
316
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Touch
,
, or
on the screen once again.
■ Displaying the title and artist name
If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the titles of the disc and track will be displayed. Up to
16 letters can be displayed.
■ Error messages
Refer to the following table and take the appropriate measures. If the problem is not
rectified, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
Message
Cause
Correction
Procedures
There is no disc in the
player.
Insert a disc.
Check CD X
or
Check DISC X
• The disc X is dirty or
damaged.
• The disc X is inserted
upside down.
• The disc X is not playable with the player.
• Clean the disc.
• Insert the disc correctly.
• Confirm the disc is playable with the player.
CD error
or
DVD error
• There is a malfunction
within the system.
• Operation is stopped
due to a high temperature inside the player.
• Eject the disc.
• Eject the disc and allow
the player to cool down.
NO MUSIC FILE
This indicates that no
playable data is included
in the disc.
Eject the disc.
3
Interior features
No CD
or
No disc
317
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or
due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protection features may not play correctly.
■ CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected.
■ If discs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-
ods
Discs may be damaged and may not play properly.
■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
318
3-3. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■ Discs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of discs, 3 in. (8 cm) disc adapters or Dual Discs.
Doing so may damage the player and/or disc insert/eject function.
● Discs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.
(12 cm).
3
● Low-quality or deformed discs.
recording area.
● Discs that have tape, stickers or CD-R
labels attached to them, or that have had
the label peeled off.
319
Interior features
● Discs with a transparent or translucent
3-3. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■ Player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or the
player itself.
● Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot.
● Do not apply oil to the player.
● Store discs away from direct sunlight.
● Never try to disassemble any part of the player.
● Do not insert more than one disc at a time.
320
3-3. Using the audio system
Playing MP3 and WMA discs
Insert an MP3 or WMA disc or press
with a disc inserted.
Audio control screen display button
Displays folder list
Disc selection
Folder selection
Repeat play
3
Search playback
Disc eject
Power Volume
Interior features
Random playback
Disc slot
Disc load
File selection
File selection
Disc change
Playback
This illustration is for a vehicle equipped with the DVD player.
321
3-3. Using the audio system
Loading, ejecting and selecting MP3 and WMA discs
P. 313
Selecting a folder
■ Selecting a folder
Touch “FOLDER
previous folder.
” or “
” on the screen to select the next/
■ Selecting a folder from the folder list
STEP 1 Touch
on the screen.
Touch the desired folder number.
STEP 2
or
: changes the list by 6
folder groups
:
:
displays the details of
the file currently playing
displays the file list
This function is available only when
the vehicle is not moving.
■ Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder
Touch and hold
on the screen until “FLDSCAN” appears. When
the desired folder is reached, touch
once again.
322
3-3. Using the audio system
Selecting and scanning files
■ Selecting one file at a time
Turn
or press  or  on
to select the desired file.
■ Selecting a file from the file list
STEP 1 Touch
on the screen to turn the folder list on.
Touch
on the folder list
STEP 2
screen.
3
Touch the desired file number.
or
: changes the list by 6
groups
:
displays the folder list
:
displays the details of
the file currently playing
This function is available only when
the vehicle is not moving.
■ Selecting a desired file by cueing the files in the folder
Touch
on the screen.
When the desired file is reached, touch
once again.
323
Interior features
STEP 3
3-3. Using the audio system
Repeat play
■ Repeating a file
Touch
on the screen.
■ Repeating all of the files in a folder
Touch and hold
on the screen until “FLD RPT” appears.
Random playback
■ Playing files from a particular folder in random order
Touch
on the screen.
■ Playing all the files on a disc in random order
Touch and hold
on the screen until “FLD RAND” appears.
■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Touch
,
■ Error messages
P. 317
324
or
on the screen once again.
3-3. Using the audio system
■ CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
■ If discs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-
ods
Discs may be damaged and may not play properly.
■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
■ MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media
TMAudio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the
media/formats on which the files are recorded.
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
● WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
325
Interior features
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
3
3-3. Using the audio system
● Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is not
finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is
scratched or marked with fingerprints.
● Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may
not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root)
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● Discs containing multi-session recordings
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs
that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title,
artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The
number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
326
3-3. Using the audio system
● MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first
checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To
make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any
files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot
be played.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they may be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This
may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
● Playback
NOTICE
■ Discs and adapters that cannot be used (P. 319)
■ CD player precautions (P. 320)
327
3
Interior features
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate
of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3
and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding
and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may
result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take
more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be
possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
3-3. Using the audio system
Using the DVD player
Insert a disc or press
with a disc inserted.
Audio/video control screen display button
Disc selection
Disc eject
Power Volume
Disc slot
Disc load
Disc change
Track and chapter
Playback
selection/fast forward/reverse
: If equipped
328
3-3. Using the audio system
Loading discs
To cancel the operation, press the
or
button. If you do not
insert a disc within 15 seconds, loading will be canceled automatically.
■ DVD hint screen
This screen appears when a DVD
video, DVD audio or video CD is
first selected with the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
Touch
once you have
read the message.
329
3
Interior features
■ Loading a single disc
STEP 1 Press
.
STEP 2 When the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, insert
a disc after the disc slot door opens.
■ Loading multiple discs
STEP 1 Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
STEP 2 When the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, insert
a disc after the disc slot door opens.
STEP 3 After inserting a disc, wait until the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, then insert the next disc after the disc slot
door has opened.
STEP 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have inserted all discs.
3-3. Using the audio system
Ejecting discs
■ Ejecting a disc
STEP 1 To select the disc to be ejected, touch the desired disc on the
screen or press  or  on
STEP 2
Press
.
and remove the disc.
■ Ejecting all discs
Press and hold
until you hear a beep, then remove the discs.
Selecting a disc
■ To select a disc to play
Touch the desired disc on the
screen or press  or on
● Audio CD, CD textP. 313
● MP3/WMA discP. 321
● DVD video/audioP. 331
● Video CDP. 344
330
.
3-3. Using the audio system
Playing DVD video/audio
For safety reasons, you can enjoy the visual contents of discs only when the
vehicle is completely stopped with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode and the parking brake applied.
While you are driving, only audio contents may be played.
When a DVD video disc or DVD audio disc is inserted while driving, the
audio contents of the main feature will automatically be played. However,
some discs may not be played from the main story.
Insert a disc or press
with a disc inserted.
■ Video control screen
Press
while the disc is playing, and the following screen
3
Interior features
appears.
Return to video screen
Change screen mode (P. 355)
331
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Control icon screen
Touch any part of the screen if no icons are shown while watching a
video, and the following screen appears.
DVD video mode
Return to top menu screen
Page 1
Menu control key
Hide control icons
Go to page 2
Return to
menu screen
Stop
Fast forward
Reverse
Page 2
Playback
Pause
Initial DVD setup
Return to
page 1
Change angle
Search desired screen
Return to menu screen
Change subtitle language
Change audio language
If
appears on the screen when you touch an icon, the operation relevant to that control is not permitted.
332
3-3. Using the audio system
DVD audio mode
Return to top menu screen
Page 1
Menu control key
Hide control icons
Go to page 2
Change the
audio format
Stop
Fast forward
Reverse
3
Initial DVD setup
Select menu number
Interior features
Page 2
Playback
Pause
Return to
page 1
Search
desired screen
Change angle
Return to registered screen
Change subtitle language
Return to previous screen
Go to next screen
If
appears on the screen when you touch an icon, the operation relevant to that control is not permitted.
333
3-3. Using the audio system
Loading, ejecting and selecting discs
P. 328
Fast forwarding/reversing a disc
Touch and hold
on
or
on the screen or press and hold  or 
until you hear a beep.
Slow playback
Touch
are touching
and then touch
. Video is played slowly while you
.
Searching a desired screen
■ Searching by title (DVD video mode)
STEP 1 Touch
on the control icon screen.
Input the desired title number and
STEP 2
then touch
.
: deletes the last input
number
: hides the icons. To display
the icons, touch
.
: returns to the previous
screen
334
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Searching by group (DVD audio mode)
STEP 1 Touch
on the control icon screen.
Input the group number and then
STEP 2
touch
.
: deletes the last input
number
: hides the icons. To display
the icons, touch
.
: returns to the previous
screen
screen and touch
.
: deletes the number
: returns to the previous
screen
■ Searching by chapter/track
Press  or  on
to select a chapter/track.
335
3
Interior features
■ Playing a bonus group (DVD audio mode only, if the DVD has bonus
options)
STEP 1 Touch
on the control icon screen.
Input the desired bonus group
STEP 2
number on the group search
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Selecting a menu number (DVD audio mode only)
STEP 1 Touch
on the control icon screen.
Input the desired menu number on
STEP 2
the screen and touch
.
Using the DVD menu
STEP 1
STEP 2
Touch
or
on the control icon screen.
Touch
if the menu control key does not appear on the
menu screen.
Touch , ,
or
to select a
menu item, then touch
to
select.
: moves icons up or down
: hides icons. To display
icons, touch
.
: returns to the previous
screen
Note that specific items or the operating method differs from one DVD to
another. Refer to the manual that comes with the DVD disc. (The above image is
an example.)
336
3-3. Using the audio system
Changing the subtitle language
Touch
screen.
on the control icon
Each time you touch the switch,
the next available language is
selected.
: hides the subtitles
: returns to the previous
screen
3
Changing the audio language (DVD video only)
on the control icon
Each time you touch the switch,
the next available language is
selected.
: returns to the previous
screen
Changing the audio format (DVD audio only)
Touch
screen.
on the control icon
Each time you touch the switch,
the next available audio format is
selected.
: returns to the previous
screen
337
Interior features
Touch
screen.
3-3. Using the audio system
Changing the angle (If the angle option is available)
STEP 1
Touch
STEP 2
on the control icon screen.
Touch
.
Each time you touch the switch,
the next available angle is selected.
: returns to the previous
screen
Initial DVD setup
■ Displaying “Setup Menu” screen
STEP 1 Touch
on the control icon screen.
After you change the initial setSTEP 2
tings, touch
.
: restores default settings
338
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Setting audio language
STEP 1 Touch
on the “Setup Menu” screen.
STEP 2 Select the desired language.
If you cannot find the desired language, touch
desired language code. (P. 341)
and input the
: returns to the previous screen
■ Setting subtitle language
STEP 1 Touch
on the “Setup Menu” screen.
STEP 2 Select the desired language.
If you cannot find the desired language, touch
desired language code. (P. 341)
and input the
3
: returns to the previous screen
If you cannot find the desired language, touch
desired language code. (P. 341)
and input the
: returns to the previous screen
■ Setting angle mark “ON” or “OFF”
If the DVD has angle options, you can turn the angle mark on or off.
Touch
on the “Setup Menu” screen. Each time you touch
the switch, the multi angle mark on the screen turns on or off alternately.
339
Interior features
■ Setting menu language
STEP 1 Touch
on the “Setup Menu” screen.
STEP 2 Select the desired language.
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Parental lock
STEP 1 Touch
STEP 2
on the “Setup Menu” screen.
Input the 4-digit personal code
and then touch
.
If you enter wrong numbers, touch
to delete the numbers.
Touch
10 times to reset the
personal code.
STEP 3
Select a parental level (1 - 8). (P. 350)
: returns to the previous screen
■ Entering a language code
If you touch
on the “Select Audio Language” screen,
“Select Subtitle Language” screen or “Select DVD Language” screen,
you can select a language by entering the 4-digit language code if that
language is available.
Input the 4-digit language code
and then touch
.
: deletes the last input digit
: returns to the previous
screen
340
3-3. Using the audio system
● Language codes
Code
Language
Code
Language
Code
Language
English
0207
Bulgarian
0712
Galician
0618
French
0208
Bihari
0714
Guarani
0405
German
0209
Bislama
0721
Gujarati
0920
Italian
0214
Bengali
0801
Hausa
0519
Spanish
0215
Tibetan
0809
Hindi
2608
Chinese
0218
Breton
0818
Croatian
1412
Dutch
0301
Catalan
0821
Hungarian
1620
Portuguese
0315
Corsican
0825
Armenian
1922
Swedish
0319
Czech
0901
Interlingua
1821
Russian
0325
Welsh
0905
Interlingue
1115
Korean
0401
Danish
0911
Inupiak
0512
Greek
0426
Bhutani
0914
Indonesian
0101
Afar
0515
Esperanto
0919
Icelandic
0102
Abkhazian
0520
Estonian
0923
Hebrew
0106
Afrikaans
0521
Basque
1001
Japanese
0113
Amharic
0601
Persian
1009
Yiddish
0118
Arabic
0609
Finnish
1023
Javanese
0119
Assamese
0610
Fiji
1101
Georgian
0125
Aymara
0615
Faroese
1111
Kazakh
0126
Azerbaijani
0625
Frisian
1112
Greenlandic
0201
Bashkir
0701
Irish
1113
Cambodian
0205
Byelorussian 0704
Scots-Gaelic 1114
3
Interior features
0514
Kannada
341
3-3. Using the audio system
Code
342
Language
Code
Language
Code
Language
1119
Kashmiri
1415
Norwegian
1914
Shona
1121
Kurdish
1503
Occitan
1915
Somali
1125
Kirghiz
1513
(Afan)
Oromo
1917
Albanian
1201
Latin
1518
Oriya
1918
Serbian
1214
Lingala
1601
Panjabi
1919
Siswati
1215
Laothian
1612
Polish
1920
Sesotho
1220
Lithuanian
1619
Pashto,
Pushto
1921
Sundanese
1222
Latvian
1721
Quechua
1923
Swahili
1307
Malagasy
1813
RhaetoRomance
2001
Tamil
1309
Maori
1814
Kirundi
2005
Telugu
1311
Macedonian 1815
Romanian
2007
Tajik
1312
Malayalam
1823
Kinyarwanda 2008
Thai
1314
Mongolian
1901
Sanskrit
2009
Tigrinya
1315
Moldavian
1904
Sindhi
2011
Turkmen
1318
Marathi
1907
Sangho
2012
Tagalog
1319
Malay
1908
SerboCroatian
2014
Setswana
1320
Maltese
1909
Sinhalese
2015
Tonga
1325
Burmese
1911
Slovak
2018
Turkish
1401
Nauru
1912
Slovenian
2019
Tsonga
1405
Nepali
1913
Samoan
2020
Tatar
3-3. Using the audio system
Code
Language
Code
Language
Code
Language
2023
Twi
2209
Vietnamese
2515
Yoruba
2111
Ukrainian
2215
Volapük
2621
Zulu
2118
Urdu
2315
Wolof
2126
Uzbek
2408
Xhosa
■ Error messages
If “Region Code Error” is displayed, check the region code printed on the DVD
matches the player's region code.
If a different message is displayed: P. 317
3
Interior features
343
3-3. Using the audio system
Playing a video CD
For safety reasons, you can enjoy the visual contents of discs only when the
vehicle is completely stopped with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode and the parking brake applied.
While you are driving, only audio contents may be played.
Insert a disc or press
with a disc inserted.
■ Video control screen
Press
while the disc is playing, and the following screen
appears.
Return to video screen
Change screen mode (P. 355)
344
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Control icon screen
Touch any part of the screen if no icons are shown while watching a
video CD, and the following screen appears.
Search track
Page 1
Hide control icons
Go to page 2
Return to
registered screen
3
Change sound-multiplex
Search next menu
Interior features
Search previous page
Page 2
Return to
page 1
Pause
Reverse
Fast forward
Playback
If
appears on the screen when you touch an icon, the operation relevant to that control is not permitted.
345
3-3. Using the audio system
Loading, ejecting and selecting discs
P. 328
Fast forwarding/reversing a video CD
Touch and hold
hold  or  on
or
on the control icon screen or press and
until you hear a beep.
Slow playback
Touch
and then touch
on the control icon screen. Video is
played slowly while you are touching
.
Using the video CD menu
Touch
on the control icon screen.
Refer to the manual that comes with the video CD for specific menu
items.
346
3-3. Using the audio system
Selecting a desired screen
■ Searching manually
Touch
on the screen, or press  or  on
or
until
the desired screen appears.
■ Searching by number
STEP 1
Touch
on the control icon screen.
STEP 2
Input the desired track number on
the screen and touch
.
: hides icons. To display
icons, touch
.
: returns to the previous
screen
Changing the sound-multiplex mode
Touch
on the control icon screen. The mode cycles through each
time the switch is touched.
“Main”  “Sub”  “Main/Sub”
■ Error messages
P. 317
347
3
Interior features
: deletes the last input
number
3-3. Using the audio system
DVD player and DVD video disc information
■ DVD video discs
● The DVD player conforms to NTSC color TV formats.
● Region code: Some DVD video discs have a region code indicating
the region in which you can use the DVD video disc. If the DVD
video disc is not labeled as “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it on this
DVD player. If you attempt to play an inappropriate DVD video disc
on this player, “Region Code Error” appears on the screen. Even if
the DVD video disc does not have a region code, you may not be
able to use it.
■ Symbols shown on DVD video discs
Symbol
Meaning
Indicates NTSC format
Indicates the number of audio tracks
Indicates the number of language subtitles
Indicates the number of angles
Indicates the screen display ratios available
Wide screen: 16:9
Standard: 4:3
Indicates the disc’s region code
ALL: in all countries
Number: region code
348
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or
due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protection features may not play correctly.
■ DVD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected while the DVD player is being used.
■ If discs are left inside the DVD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-
ods
3
Discs may be damaged and may not play properly.
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the DVD player.
■ DVD video disc information
● DVD video discs
A DVD video disc is a Digital Versatile Disc that holds video. DVD video discs
have adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world standards of digital compression
technologies. The picture data is compressed by 1/40 on average and stored.
Variable rate encoded technology in which the volume of data assigned to the
picture is changed depending on the picture format has also been adopted.
Audio data is stored using PCM and Dolby digital, which enables higher quality
of sound. Furthermore, multi-angle and multi-language features will also help
you enjoy the more advanced technology of DVD video.
349
Interior features
■ Lens cleaners
3-3. Using the audio system
● Viewer restrictions
This feature limits what can be viewed in conformity with the level of restrictions
of the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on the DVD video disc.
Some DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent scenes are skipped or
replaced with other scenes.
Level 1: DVD video discs for children can be played.
Level 2-7: DVD video discs for children and G-rated movies can be played.
Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can be played.
● Multi-angle option
You can enjoy the same scene from different angles.
● Multi-language option
You can select the subtitle and audio languages.
● Region codes
The region codes are provided on DVD players and DVD discs. If the DVD
video disc does not have the same region code as the DVD player, you cannot
play the disc on the DVD player. (P. 348)
● Audio
This DVD player can play linear PCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio format
DVDs. Other decoded types cannot be played.
● Title and chapter
Video and audio programs stored in DVD video discs are divided into parts by
title and chapter.
Title: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs.
Usually, one movie, one album, or one audio program is assigned as a title.
Chapter: A title is comprised of one or more chapters.
350
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Sound
● Dolby Digital
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
©1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by
method claims of certain U. S. patents and other intellectual property rights
owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation,
and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision Corporation.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
● DTS
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater
System, Inc.
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■ DVD video precaution
Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize
the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be startled by louder sound effects or startled when you change to a different audio
source.
Loud sounds may have a significant impact on the human body or pose a driving
hazard. Keep this in mind when you adjust the volume.
NOTICE
■ Unsuitable discs, and player precautions
P. 319
351
3-3. Using the audio system
Optimal use of the audio/video system
Press
to display the audio/video control screen.
Operating the radio and audio CD
Adjust sound
quality and balance
Adjust the DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
Operating the DVD video/audio and video CD
Adjust sound
quality and balance
Adjust screen ratio
Adjust the DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
352
3-3. Using the audio system
Adjusting sound quality and balance
STEP 1
Touch
on the screen.
Adjust the settings, referring to the
following table.
STEP 2
Once you have finished, touch
.
Sound quality
mode
Display
Level
-5 to 5
Mid-pitched
tones*
-5 to 5
Low-pitched
tones*
-5 to 5
Front/rear
volume balance
F7 to R7
Left/right volume
balance
L7 to R7
Interior features
High-pitched
tones*
3
Touch
or
or
or
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each radio, CD or DVD
mode.
353
3-3. Using the audio system
Setting DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
The following features can be set as desired by touching
screen:
With CD player
on the
With DVD player
■ Turning Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) “ON” or “OFF”
Touch
or
.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the
noise level as you drive your vehicle.
■ Changing the listening position (with CD player only)
The speaker balance can be changed to produce the best sound for
each listening position.
Touch
.
The listening position changes as follows each time the switch is
touched.
Display
Listening position
Position best suited to the driver's seat
Position best suited to the driver's and front passenger’s seat
354
3-3. Using the audio system
Display
Listening position
Position best suited to the rear seats
Position best suited to all seats
■ Turning the surround “ON” or “OFF” (with DVD player only)
Touch
or
.
Setting the screen ratio mode (with DVD player only)
Touch
on the screen.
Touch
STEP 2
one
of
,
or
to
match the screen ratio printed on
the DVD.
Screen ratio mode
Details
“NORMAL”
Suitable for 4:3 screen ratio
“WIDE1”
Expands the normal screen
horizontally to fill the display
“WIDE2”
Suitable for 16:9 screen ratio
355
Interior features
STEP 1
3
3-3. Using the audio system
Using the AUX adapter
This adapter can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it
through the vehicle’s speakers.
Connect the portable audio
device.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
.
■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio
device.
356
3-3. Using the audio system
Using the rear seat audio controls
Some front audio features can be controlled from the rear seats.
5-seat models
Volume up/down
Selecting a folder
Power on/off
Selecting a disc
3
Radio: Selecting a station
Audio CD or DVD audio: Selecting a track
Video CD or DVD video: Selecting a chapter
MP3 CD or WMA CD: Selecting a file
: If equipped
357
Interior features
Selecting an audio
source
3-3. Using the audio system
4-seat models
Volume up/down
Power on/off
Radio: Selecting a station
Audio CD or DVD audio: Selecting a track
Video CD or DVD video: Selecting a chapter
MP3 CD or WMA CD: Selecting a file
Selecting an audio source
Selecting a folder
Selecting a disc
Turning the power
Press
to turn the front audio system on.
Pressing the button again turns the system off.
Changing the audio source
Press
to change the audio source. The audio source changes as follows each time the button is pressed. If a CD or DVD is not inserted, that
mode will be skipped.
With CD player:
AM FM1  FM2  CD player AUX AM
With DVD player:
AM FM1  FM2  DVD player AUX AM
358
3-3. Using the audio system
Adjusting the volume
Press  on
to increase the volume and  to decrease the volume.
Press and hold the button to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
Selecting a radio station
STEP 1
Press
to select a frequency band.
STEP 2
Press  or  on
to select a radio station.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold the button until you hear a
beep.
STEP 2
Press
Press
STEP 3
Press  or  on
STEP 1
Interior features
Selecting a track (audio CD)
to select the CD player.
(DISC) to select a disc.
to select a track.
Selecting a track (audio CD or DVD audio) or chapter (video CD or DVD video)
STEP 2
Press
Press
STEP 3
Press  or  on
STEP 1
3
to select the DVD player.
(DISC) to select a disc.
to select a track or chapter.
359
3-3. Using the audio system
Selecting a file (MP3 CD or WMA CD)
STEP 3
Press
Press
Press
STEP 4
Press  or  on
STEP 1
STEP 2
to select the CD player or DVD player.
(DISC) to select a disc.
(FOLDER) to select a folder.
to select a file.
■ Button lock function
To prevent inadvertent operation, some buttons on the rear armrest can be locked.
(P. 277)
■ Rear control panel illumination off function
Control panel illumination on the rear armrest can be turned off. (P. 278)
■ When “ERROR”, “WAIT” or “NO MUSIC” is shown on the display
Refer to the following and take the appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
“ERROR”: This indicates a trouble either in the disc or inside the player. The disc
may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT”:
Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Eject
the disc and allow the player to cool down.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that an MP3/WMA file is not included in the disc.
360
3-3. Using the audio system
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering
wheel.
Turns the power on, selects
audio source
Volume
Radio mode: Selects radio
stations
CD mode: Selects
tracks,
files (MP3 and
WMA) and discs
3
Interior features
DVD mode: Selects tracks,
chapters
and
discs
Turning on the power
Press
when the audio system is turned off.
The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down for 1 second
or more.
Changing the audio source
Press
when the audio system is turned on. The audio source
changes as follows each time the switch is pressed. If no discs are inserted
in the player, that mode will be skipped.
With CD player:
FM1FM2CD playerAUXAMFM1
With DVD player:
FM1FM2DVD playerAUXAMFM1
361
3-3. Using the audio system
Adjusting the volume
Pull
to increase the volume and
to decrease the volume.
Hold up the switch to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
Selecting a radio station
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
to select the radio mode.
Press or  on
to select a radio station.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold  or  on the switch until
you hear a beep.
Selecting a track/file or chapter
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
to select the CD or DVD mode.
Press  or  on
to select the desired track/file or chapter.
Selecting a disc in the CD or DVD player
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
to select the CD or DVD mode.
Press and hold  or  on
until a beep is heard.
■ Canceling automatic selection of a radio station
Press the same switch.
CAUTION
■ To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
362
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Rear seat entertainment system features
The rear seat entertainment system is designed for the rear passengers to
enjoy audio and DVD video separately from the front audio system.
5-seat models
3
Interior features
Front audio system
Display
Rear seat entertainment system controller
A/V input adapter
: If equipped
363
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
4-seat models
Front audio system
Display
DVD player (if equipped)
Headphone volume control dials and headphone jacks
A/V input adapter
Rear seat entertainment system controller
Power outlet
364
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Rear seat entertainment system controller
To use the buttons under the cover,
slide the cover down.
Opening and closing the display
3
● Open
Press
,
,
or
.
or
.
● Close
Press
If the display is closed with an
image shown, the image will automatically turn off. (The sound will
not be turned off.)
Opening and closing operations can
be performed from the front seat.
(P. 241)
365
Interior features
■ Opening and closing the display
Without navigation system
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
With navigation system
● Open
Press
,
or
,
,
.
● Close
Press
or
.
If the display is closed with an
image shown, the image will automatically turn off. (The sound will
not be turned off.)
Opening and closing operations can
be performed from the front seat.
(P. 241)
■ Tilting the display
The display angles change as follows each time


is pressed.


The display angle is memorized
and will be recalled when the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode again.
366
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
■ Caution screen
This screen appears for a few seconds when the rear display is
opened. During this time, only
can be operated.
Headphone jacks (4-seat models)
To listen to the rear audio, use
headphones.
367
Interior features
To use the headphones
Connect them to the jack.
To adjust the volume
Turn the knob clockwise to
increase the volume. Turn the
knob counterclockwise to
decrease the volume.
3
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Changing the source
Press
to display the audio
source selection screen.
Select an audio source.
Changing the speaker output
To play the rear audio over the
speakers in the vehicle, turn
on.
368
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
■ The rear seat entertainment system can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■ Jam protection function
The display will stop closing and return to its previous position if something gets in
the way of it closing.
■ When
appears on the screen
It indicates that the selected icon cannot be used at this time.
■ Rear system lock
P. 241
■ Before using the controller (for new vehicle owners)
■ When the controller batteries are fully depleted
Remove the depleted batteries and install
new batteries.
■ Headphones
With some headphones generally available in the market, it may be difficult to catch
signals properly. Lexus recommends the use of Lexus genuine wireless headphones.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
369
3
Interior features
An insulating sheet is set to prevent the batteries from being depleted. Remove the insulating sheet before using the remote control.
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
■ Volume
● Adjust the volume when you connect the headphones to the jack. Loud sounds
may have a significant impact on the human body.
● Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize
the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be
startled by louder sound effects or when you change to a different audio source.
Be sure to adjust the volume with this in mind.
CAUTION
■ When the rear seat entertainment system is not used
Keep the display closed.
In the event of an accident or sudden braking, an occupant may hit the opened display resulting in injury.
■ To prevent accidents and electric shock
Do not disassemble or modify the remote control.
■ When the remote controller is not used
Stow the remote controller.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
■ Closing the display
Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
■ For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Canada
Laser products (P. 307)
370
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
NOTICE
■ Cleaning the display
Wipe the display with a dry soft cloth.
If the screen is wiped with a rough cloth, the surface of the screen may be
scratched.
■ To prevent damage to the remote control
● Keep the remote control away from direct sunlight, high temperature and high
humidity.
● Do not drop or knock the remote control against hard objects.
● Do not sit on or place heavy objects on the remote control.
■ DVD player
Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the DVD player. Do not insert anything
other than a disc into the slot.
3
Interior features
■ Closing the display
Do not close the display using your hand. Doing so may result in a malfunction.
371
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Using the radio
Select radio mode on the
source screen to display the
control screen.
Selecting a preset station
Press  or  on
until the desired station band appears on the
screen.
Tuning the station
Press  or  on
until the desired station appears on the screen.
Press  or  on
and the stations will be searched automatically one
after another.
372
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Using the front DVD player
Turning on DVD player mode
Selecting a disc
Selecting a disc
3
until the
desired slot number appears on
the screen.
● Audio CD, CD text P. 376
● MP3/WMA disc P. 377
● DVD video/audio P. 379
● Video CD P. 392
373
Interior features
Press  or  on
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Using the rear DVD player
Press
or select “RrDVD” on the source screen to
display the control screen.
Loading a disc
STEP 1
Open the cover.
STEP 2
Insert the disc into the slot with the
label side up.
The “DISC” indicator light turns on
while the disc is loaded.
The player will play the track or
chapter, and will repeat it after it
reaches the end.
STEP 3
Close the cover.
: If equipped
374
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Ejecting a disc
STEP 1
Open the cover.
STEP 2
Press
and remove the disc.
3
Interior features
STEP 3
Close the cover.
Playing a disc
● Audio CD, CD text P. 376
● MP3 disc P. 377
● DVD video/audio P. 379
● Video CD P. 392
The rear DVD player cannot play
WMA files.
375
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Playing an audio CD/CD text
■ Selecting a track
Press  or  on
until the
desired track number appears
on the screen.
■ Fast forwarding or reversing a track
Press and hold  or  on
376
.
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Playing WMA (front DVD player only)/MP3 discs
■ Selecting a file
Press  or  on
until the
desired file number appears on
the screen.
■ Selecting a folder
Press  or  on
appears on the screen.
until the desired folder number
Press  or  on
Interior features
■ Fast forwarding or reversing a file
3
.
377
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Playing the HDD audio (vehicles with navigation system)
Select “HDD” on the source
screen to display the control
screen.
Selecting a track
Press  or  on
until the desired track number appears on the
screen.
Selecting a list
Press  or  on
on the screen.
until the desired track number appears
Fast forwarding or reversing a track
Press  or  on
378
.
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Playing a DVD video/audio
■ Controller
379
3
Interior features
Turning on the DVD mode
Selecting a chapter/track
Reversing a disc
Turning on the title selection
screen
Changing the subtitle language
Turning on the control icon
screen
Changing the audio language
Stopping a disc
Turning on the menu disc
Fast forwarding a disc
Playing/pausing a disc
Selecting an icon
Inputting the selected icon
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
■ Control icon screen
Press
if no icons are shown while watching a DVD video, and
the following screen appears.
DVD video mode
Return to top menu screen
Page 1
Hide control icons
Go to page 2
Return to
menu screen
Stop
Fast forward
Reverse
Page 2
Playback
Pause
Initial DVD setup
Return to
page 1
Change angle
Search desired screen
Return to menu screen
Change subtitle language
Change audio language
If
appears on the screen when you select an icon, the operation
relevant to that control is not permitted.
380
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
DVD audio mode
Return to top menu screen
Page 1
Hide control icons
Go to page 2
Change the
audio format
Stop
Fast forward
Reverse
3
Initial DVD setup
Select menu number
Interior features
Page 2
Playback
Pause
Return to
page 1
Search
desired screen
Change angle
Return to registered screen
Change subtitle language
Return to previous screen
Go to next screen
If
appears on the screen when you select an icon, the operation
relevant to that control is not permitted.
381
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Turning on or off the control icons
Press
to turn on the control icons.
Press
once again or select
to turn off the control icon.
Turning on the title selection screen
Press
or select
to turn on the title selection screen. For the
operation of the title selection screen, see the separate manual for the
DVD disc.
Turning on the menu screen (DVD video mode only)
Press
or select
to turn on the menu screen. For the operation of the menu screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc.
Fast forwarding/reversing a disc
Perform either of the following:
● Select
or
on the screen by pressing and holding
● Press and hold  or  on
.
.
Slow playback
Select
and then select
select
by pressing and holding
382
. Video is played slowly when you
.
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Returning to the previous screen
Select
to return to the previous screen. For the operation of the
menu screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc.
Searching a desired screen
■ Searching by title (DVD video mode)
STEP 1 Select
on the control icon screen.
Input the desired title number and
STEP 2
then select
.
: deletes the last input
number
3
: hides the icons. To display
Interior features
the icons, select
.
: returns to the previous
screen
■ Searching by group (DVD audio mode)
STEP 1 Select
on the control icon screen.
Input the group number and then
STEP 2
select
.
: deletes the last input
number
: hides the icons. To display
the icons, select
.
: returns to the previous
screen
383
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
■ Playing a bonus group (DVD audio mode only, if the DVD has bonus
options)
STEP 1 Select
on the control icon screen.
Input the desired bonus group
STEP 2
number on the group search
screen and select
.
: deletes the number
: returns to the previous
screen
■ Searching by chapter/track
Press  or  on
to select a chapter/track.
■ Selecting a menu number (DVD audio mode only)
STEP 1 Select
on the control icon screen.
Input the desired menu number on
STEP 2
the screen and select
384
.
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Changing the subtitle language
STEP 1
Press
or select
on the control icon screen.
Select
STEP 2
.
Each time you press
, the next
available language is selected.
: hides the control icons
: returns to the previous
screen
3
Changing the audio language (DVD video only)
STEP 2
Press
or select
on the control icon screen.
Select
.
Each time you press
, the next
available language is selected.
: returns to the previous
screen
385
Interior features
STEP 1
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Changing the audio format (DVD audio only)
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
or select
on the control icon screen.
Select
.
Each time you press
, the next
available audio format is selected.
: returns to the previous
screen
Changing the angle (If the angle option is available)
STEP 1
STEP 2
Select
on the control icon screen.
Select
.
Each time you press
, the next
available angle is selected.
: returns to the previous
screen
386
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Initial DVD setup
■ Displaying “Setup Menu” screen
STEP 1 Select
on the control icon screen.
After you change the initial setSTEP 2
tings, select
.
: restores default settings
3
on the “Setup Menu” screen.
If you cannot find the desired language, select
input the desired language code. (P. 389)
and
: returns to the previous screen
■ Setting subtitle language
STEP 1 Select
STEP 2 Select the desired language.
on the “Setup Menu” screen.
If you cannot find the desired language, select
input the desired language code. (P. 389)
and
: returns to the previous screen
■ Setting menu language
STEP 1 Select
STEP 2 Select the desired language.
on the “Setup Menu” screen.
If you cannot find the desired language, select
input the desired language code. (P. 389)
and
: returns to the previous screen
387
Interior features
■ Setting audio language
STEP 1 Select
STEP 2 Select the desired language.
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
■ Setting angle mark “ON” or “OFF”
If the DVD has angle options, you can turn the angle mark on or off.
Select
on the “Setup Menu” screen. Each
time you press
alternately.
, the multi angle mark on the screen turns on or off
■ Parental lock
STEP 1 Select
STEP 2
on the “Setup Menu” screen.
Input the 4-digit personal code
and then select
.
If you enter wrong numbers, select
to delete the numbers.
Select
10 times to reset the
personal code.
STEP 3
Select a parental level (1 - 8). (P. 400)
: returns to the previous screen
■ Entering a language code
If you select
on the “Select Audio Language” screen,
“Select Subtitle Language” screen or “DVD Language” screen, you
can select a language by entering the 4-digit language code if that language is available.
Input the 4-digit language code
and then select
.
: deletes the last input digit
: returns to the previous
screen
388
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
● Language codes
Code
Language
Code
Language
Code
Language
English
0207
Bulgarian
0712
Galician
0618
French
0208
Bihari
0714
Guarani
0405
German
0209
Bislama
0721
Gujarati
0920
Italian
0214
Bengali
0801
Hausa
0519
Spanish
0215
Tibetan
0809
Hindi
2608
Chinese
0218
Breton
0818
Croatian
1412
Dutch
0301
Catalan
0821
Hungarian
1620
Portuguese
0315
Corsican
0825
Armenian
1922
Swedish
0319
Czech
0901
Interlingua
1821
Russian
0325
Welsh
0905
Interlingue
1115
Korean
0401
Danish
0911
Inupiak
0512
Greek
0426
Bhutani
0914
Indonesian
0101
Afar
0515
Esperanto
0919
Icelandic
0102
Abkhazian
0520
Estonian
0923
Hebrew
0106
Afrikaans
0521
Basque
1001
Japanese
0113
Amharic
0601
Persian
1009
Yiddish
0118
Arabic
0609
Finnish
1023
Javanese
0119
Assamese
0610
Fiji
1101
Georgian
0125
Aymara
0615
Faroese
1111
Kazakh
0126
Azerbaijani
0625
Frisian
1112
Greenlandic
0201
Bashkir
0701
Irish
1113
Cambodian
0205
Byelorussian 0704
Scots-Gaelic 1114
3
Interior features
0514
Kannada
389
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Code
390
Language
Code
Language
Code
Language
1119
Kashmiri
1415
Norwegian
1914
Shona
1121
Kurdish
1503
Occitan
1915
Somali
1125
Kirghiz
1513
(Afan)
Oromo
1917
Albanian
1201
Latin
1518
Oriya
1918
Serbian
1214
Lingala
1601
Panjabi
1919
Siswati
1215
Laothian
1612
Polish
1920
Sesotho
1220
Lithuanian
1619
Pashto,
Pushto
1921
Sundanese
1222
Latvian
1721
Quechua
1923
Swahili
1307
Malagasy
1813
RhaetoRomance
2001
Tamil
1309
Maori
1814
Kirundi
2005
Telugu
1311
Macedonian 1815
Romanian
2007
Tajik
1312
Malayalam
1823
Kinyarwanda 2008
Thai
1314
Mongolian
1901
Sanskrit
2009
Tigrinya
1315
Moldavian
1904
Sindhi
2011
Turkmen
1318
Marathi
1907
Sangho
2012
Tagalog
1319
Malay
1908
SerboCroatian
2014
Setswana
1320
Maltese
1909
Sinhalese
2015
Tonga
1325
Burmese
1911
Slovak
2018
Turkish
1401
Nauru
1912
Slovenian
2019
Tsonga
1405
Nepali
1913
Samoan
2020
Tatar
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Code
Language
Code
Language
Code
Language
2023
Twi
2209
Vietnamese
2515
Yoruba
2111
Ukrainian
2215
Volapük
2621
Zulu
2118
Urdu
2315
Wolof
2126
Uzbek
2408
Xhosa
■ Error messages
If “Region Code Error” is displayed, check the region code printed on the DVD
matches the player's region code.
If a different message is displayed: P. 396
3
Interior features
391
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Playing a video CD
■ Controller
Selecting a track
Reversing a disc
Turning on the control icon
screen
Stopping a disc
Fast forwarding a disc
Playing/pausing a disc
Selecting an icon
Inputting the selected icon
392
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
■ Control icon screen
Press
if no icons are shown while watching a video CD, and
the following screen appears.
Select menu number
Hide control icons
Page 1
Go to page 2
Return to
registered screen
3
Change sound-multiplex
Search next menu
Interior features
Search previous page
Page 2
Return to
page 1
Pause
Fast forward
Reverse
Playback
If
appears on the screen when you select an icon, the operation
relevant to that control is not permitted.
393
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Fast forwarding/reversing the video CD
Perform either of the following:
● Select
or
on the screen by pressing and holding
● Press and hold  or  on
.
.
Slow playback
Select
and then select
select
by pressing and holding
. Video is played slowly when you
.
Using the video CD menu
Select
.
Refer to the manual that comes with the video CD for specific menu
items.
394
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Selecting a desired screen
■ Selecting a menu number
STEP 1 Select
on the control icon screen.
Input the desired menu number on
STEP 2
the screen and select
.
3
■ Searching manually
or
on the screen, or press  or  on
until the
desired screen appears.
Changing the sound-multiplex mode
Select
on the control icon screen. The mode cycles through each
time the
is pressed.
“Main”  “Sub”  “Main/Sub”
395
Interior features
Select
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
DVD player and DVD video disc information
■ Error messages
Refer to the following table and take the appropriate measures. If the
problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
Message
396
Cause
Correction
Procedures
No Disc
There is no disc in the
player.
Insert a disc.
DISC X Check
• The disc X is dirty or
damaged.
• The disc X is inserted
upside down.
• The disc X is not playable with the player.
• Clean the disc.
• Insert the disc correctly.
• Confirm the disc is playable with the player.
DVD Error
• There is a malfunction
within the system.
• Operation is stopped
due to a high temperature inside the player.
• Eject the disc.
• Eject the disc and allow
the player to cool down.
NO MUSIC FILE
This indicates that no
playable data is included
in the disc.
Eject the disc.
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
■ DVD video discs
● The DVD player conforms to NTSC color TV formats.
● Region code: Some DVD video discs have a region code indicating
the region in which you can use the DVD video disc. If the DVD
video disc is not labeled as “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it on this
DVD player. If you attempt to play an inappropriate DVD video disc
on this player, “Region Code Error” appears on the screen. Even if
the DVD video disc does not have a region code, you may not be
able to use it.
● The rear DVD player does not support multi-channel surround
sound. (Only 2-channel sound is output.)
3
Interior features
397
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
■ Symbols shown on DVD video discs
Symbol
Meaning
Indicates NTSC format
Indicates the number of audio tracks
Indicates the number of language subtitles
Indicates the number of angles
Indicates the screen display ratios available
Wide screen: 16:9
Standard: 4:3
Indicates the disc’s region code
ALL: in all countries
Number: region code
398
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or
due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protection features may not play correctly.
■ DVD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected while the DVD player is being used.
■ If discs are left inside the DVD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-
ods
3
Discs may be damaged and may not play properly.
Interior features
■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the DVD player.
399
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
■ DVD video disc information
● DVD video discs
A DVD video disc is a Digital Versatile Disc that holds video. DVD video discs
have adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world standards of digital compression
technologies. The picture data is compressed by 1/40 on average and stored.
Variable rate encoded technology in which the volume of data assigned to the
picture is changed depending on the picture format has also been adopted.
Audio data is stored using PCM and Dolby digital, which enables higher quality
of sound. Furthermore, multi-angle and multi-language features will also help
you enjoy the more advanced technology of DVD video.
● Viewer restrictions
This feature limits what can be viewed in conformity with the level of restrictions
of the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on the DVD video disc.
Some DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent scenes are skipped or
replaced with other scenes.
Level 1: DVD video discs for children can be played.
Level 2-7: DVD video discs for children and G-rated movies can be played.
Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can be played.
● Multi-angle option
You can enjoy the same scene from different angles.
● Multi-language option
You can select the subtitle and audio languages.
● Region codes
The region codes are provided on DVD players and DVD discs. If the DVD
video disc does not have the same region code as the DVD player, you cannot
play the disc on the DVD player. (P. 397)
● Audio
This DVD player can play linear PCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio format
DVDs. Other decoded types cannot be played.
● Title and chapter
Video and audio programs stored in DVD video discs are divided into parts by
title and chapter.
Title: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs.
Usually, one movie, one album, or one audio program is assigned as a title.
Chapter: A title is comprised of one or more chapters.
400
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
■ Sound
● Dolby Digital
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
©1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by
method claims of certain U. S. patents and other intellectual property rights
owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation,
and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision Corporation.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
● DTS
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater
System, Inc.
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media TMAudio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the
media/formats on which the files are recorded.
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
401
Interior features
■ MP3 and WMA files
3
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
● WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
● Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is not
finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is
scratched or marked with fingerprints.
● Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may
not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root)
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● Discs containing multi-session recordings
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs
that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.
402
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title,
artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2*, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The
number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
*: Not compatible with rear DVD player.
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
● MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first
checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To
make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any
files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they may be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This
may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
● Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate
of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3
and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding
and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may
result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take
more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be
possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
403
Interior features
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot
be played.
3
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
CAUTION
■ DVD video precaution
Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize
the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be startled by louder sound effects or startled when you change to a different audio
source.
Loud sounds may have a significant impact on the human body or pose a driving
hazard. Keep this in mind when you adjust the volume.
NOTICE
■ Discs and adapters that cannot be used
P. 319
■ Player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or the
player itself.
● Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot.
● Do not apply oil to the player.
● Store discs away from direct sunlight.
● Never try to disassemble any part of the player.
404
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Using the video mode
Press
mode.
to select the video
Before switching to the video
mode, connect the audio-video
equipment to the A/V input
adapter.
Using the adapter
3
5-seat models
The A/V input adapter is composed of 3 input adapters.
Yellow: Image input adapter
White: Left channel audio input
adapter
Red: Right channel audio input
adapter
4-seat models
405
Interior features
Open the cover.
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Changing the PAL format
Press
.
If the video does not appear, turn
on.
will be displayed when
PAL format equipment is connected to the A/V input adapter.
■ A/V input adapter
The rear seat entertainment system plays videos and sound when audio-video
equipment is connected to the A/V input adapter. For details, refer to the manufacturer's instructions.
■ Power outlet
The power outlet is used to connect the audio-video equipment. (P. 480)
NOTICE
■ When the A/V input adapter is not in use
Keep the A/V input adapter cover closed.
Inserting anything other than an appropriate plug may cause electrical failure or a
short circuit.
406
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Changing other setting
Setting the display mode
Pressing
changes the display
modes sequentially as follows:
NormalWide 1 Wide 2
Adjusting the screen
3
Press
.
Press
or
to input it.
“Color”
Red
Green
“Tone”
Lighter
Darker
“Contrast”
Weaker
Stronger
“Brightness”
Darker
Brighter
407
Interior features
Select the brightness, contrast, tone
or color, and make adjustments.
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Automatic closing of the rear display
Press
.
If
is on, the display will
automatically close when the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned OFF.
The display will automatically open
when the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is turned to ACCESSORY
or IGNITION ON mode.
Display the map screen (with navigation system)
Press
.
The map screen will appear.
408
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Hands-free system (for cellular phone)
The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your mobile
phone without touching it.
This system supports Bluetooth® mobile phones. Bluetooth® is a wireless
data system that allows the mobile phone to wirelessly connect to the
hands-free system and outgoing/incoming calls.
Touch screen with navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to
the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Touch screen without navigation system
■ Telephone switch
■ Microphone
The person you are speaking to
can be heard from the driver’s
side speaker.
To use the hands-free system, you must register your Bluetooth®
phone in the system. (P. 414)
: If equipped
409
3
Interior features
Sending/Receiving/
“Telephone” screen display
(when stopped)
End call
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Status display
You can check such indicators as signal strength and battery charge on
the “Telephone” screen.
Connection status
Battery charge
Call area
Signal strength
Indicators
Connection status
Conditions
Blue: Good
Yellow: Bad
: Not connected
Battery charge
Call area
Signal strength
410
: Full
: Low
: Empty
“Rm”: Roaming area
“Hm”: Home area
: Good
: Bad
: Not connected
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
■ When using the hands-free system
● The audio system and voice guidance are muted when making a call.
● If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.
● If the received call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.
● Try to face toward the microphone as much as possible when speaking.
● In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
411
3
Interior features
• When driving on unpaved roads
• When driving at high speeds
• If a window is open
• If the air-conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone
• If the air-conditioning is set to high
■ Conditions under which the system will not operate
● If using a mobile phone that does not support Bluetooth®
● If the mobile phone is switched off
● If you are outside service range
● If the mobile phone is not connected
● If the mobile phone's battery is low
■ Bluetooth® antenna
The antenna is built into the display. If the mobile phone is behind the seat or in the
console box, or touching or covered by metal objects, connection status may deteriorate.
■ Battery charge/Signal status
This display may not correspond exactly with the mobile phone itself.
■ About Bluetooth®
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
■ Compatible models
Compatible with HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 and OPP (Object Push Profile)
Ver. 1.1.
If your cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth®
phone. If your cellular phone supports OPP alone, you cannot use the Bluetooth®
phone.
■ Certification for the hands-free system
FCC ID: BABBT007A
BABBT008A
IC ID: 2024B-BT007A
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
■ FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radio Frequency Exposure. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure
limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very
low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive
exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) and more between the radiator and person’s body
(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and legs).
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
■ Caution while driving
Do not use the mobile phone or connect the Bluetooth® system.
412
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
NOTICE
■ When leaving the vehicle
Do not leave your mobile phone in the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle may
become hot, causing damage to the phone.
3
Interior features
413
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Using the Bluetooth® phone
Bluetooth® connection status
Character deletion
Display last
person called
Make a call
To display the screen shown above, press
, and touch
“Information” screen.
Registering a Bluetooth® phone
You can register up to 6 phones in the system.
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
414
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
Touch
.
.
3
Input the passkey displayed on the
screen into your phone.
If the message “Bluetooth*
connection
successful”
is
displayed, registration is complete.
If the message “Bluetooth*
connection failed. Please check the
“Passkey” and the settings of the
telephone” is displayed, start again
from the beginning.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
415
Interior features
STEP 6
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Bluetooth® phone connection
There are two connection methods available—automatic and manual.
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
on the “Telephone” screen.
Choose one of the following methods.
Automatic connection
STEP 4
.
on the “Information” screen.
If the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is in the ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode, the system
will automatically connect to the
Bluetooth® phone. Touching “Auto
Connect” will turn it on/off.
Manual connection
If automatic connection fails or is
turned off, connection must be
made manually.
If the message “Bluetooth*
connection
successful”
is
displayed, connection is complete.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
■ Reconnecting to the Bluetooth® phone
If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch in the ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, the system will automatically attempt to reconnect.
If the phone is turned off, the system will not attempt to reconnect. In this case, connection must be made manually, or the phone must be re-selected.
416
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Making a call
Once the Bluetooth® phone is registered, you can make a call using the
following procedure:
■ Dialing
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
Input the phone number.
STEP 3
To delete the inputted phone number, touch
.
STEP 4
Touch
or press
on the steering wheel.
■ Dialing from the phone book
You can dial a number from the phone book data imported from your
mobile phone. Up to 1000 entries may be stored in the phone book.
(P. 437)
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
417
Interior features
To dial the last inputted phone
number, touch
.
3
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
STEP 4
Choose the desired name to call
from the list.
STEP 5
Choose the number and then
touch
or press
steering wheel.
on the
■ Dialing from history
You can make a call from past dialed numbers or received calls.
Up to 5 numbers are stored, with the last recent number being deleted
to make room for a new number.
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
418
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Choose the number to call from
the list.
STEP 4
To choose a number from the
incoming calls history, touch
and choose a number to
call.
Touch
or press
steering wheel.
STEP 5
on the
3
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
Choose the desired number to
make a call.
To change the page, touch
or
.
419
Interior features
■ Calling using speed dial
You can make a call using numbers registered from the phone book
and call history. (P. 430)
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
■ Calling using voice recognition
Using voice recognition, you can call by name from the “Phone Book”
screen, call by number from the “Telephone” screen, and send tones
from the “Call” screen. (P. 425)
Talk switch
● Calling by name from the “Phone Book” screen
STEP 1
Pull
.
STEP 2
Following the system guidance, wait until a beep and then say the
desired name.
If there are multiple entries for the same name,
will be displayed.
To select the next candidate, touch
.
STEP 3
Following the system guidance, pull
STEP 4
Following the system guidance, wait until a beep and then say
“Dial”.
420
.
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
● Calling by number from the “Telephone” screen
STEP 1
Pull
.
STEP 2
Following the system guidance, wait until a beep and then say the
desired number.
STEP 3
Following the system guidance, pull
3
.
STEP 1
Pull
.
STEP 2
Following the system guidance, wait until a beep and then say the
desired number.
STEP 3
Following the system guidance, pull
STEP 4
Following the system guidance, wait until a beep and then say
“Yes”.
.
421
Interior features
Following the system guidance, wait until a beep and then say
“Dial”.
● Sending tones from the “Call” screen
STEP 4
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
■ Outgoing/incoming call history list
● If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the phone
book, the name is displayed in the call history.
● If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is dis-
played in the made calls history.
●
is displayed to the left of phone number for unanswered calls.
●
is displayed to the left of the phone number for refused calls.
● Calls where the number is unavailable, such as public telephones, are not stored
in the call history.
■ When driving
● The functions “Dialing”, “Dialing from the phone book”, and “Dialing from
history” are unavailable.
● If you press
on the steering wheel, the “Speed Dial” screen is displayed. At
this time, phone numbers will not be displayed. Choose from the names displayed to make a call.
■ International calls
You may not be able to make international calls, depending on the mobile phone in
use.
■ To display the voice recognition command list
STEP 1 After
pulling
,
touch
. If the “Operating
Guide” screen is displayed, touch
.
STEP 2 Touch
422
.
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
■ To display the voice recognition operating guide
STEP 1 After
pulling
,
touch
. If the “Command List”
screen is displayed,
touch
.
STEP 2 Touch
.
■ To cancel voice recognition
● Pull and hold
● Press
● Touch
.
on the steering wheel.
. (excluding command verification)
3
■ When using voice recognition
423
Interior features
Use correct commands and speak clearly, otherwise the system may not correctly
recognize the command. Wind or other noises may also cause the system not to
recognize the desired command.
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Receiving a call
When a call is received, the following screen is displayed together with a
sound.
Touch
or press
steering wheel.
on the
■ To refuse a call
Touch
or press
on the steering wheel.
■ To adjust the received call volume
Touch
or
. You can also adjust the volume using the steering
switches.
■ International calls
Received international calls may not be displayed correctly, depending on the
mobile phone in use.
424
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Speaking on the phone
The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone.
■ To prevent the other party from hearing your voice
Touch
.
■ Inputting key tones
When using phone services such as an answering service or a bank,
you can store phone numbers and code numbers in the phone book.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Touch
.
Input the number.
If repeated tone symbols* are
stored in the phone book,
and
are displayed on the
right side of the screen.
*: Repeated tone symbols are symbols or numbers displayed as p
or w, that come after the phone
number.
(e.g. 056133p0123w#1✽)
425
3
Interior features
■ To adjust the received call volume
Touch
or
. You can also adjust the volume using the steering
switches.
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
STEP 3
Confirm the number displayed on the screen, and touch
If you touch
.
, operation is completed without making a call.
■ To transfer a call
Touch
.
■ To hang up
Touch
or press
on the steering wheel.
■ Transferring calls
● It is not possible to transfer from hands-free to the mobile phone while driving.
● If you transfer from the mobile phone to hands-free, the hands-free screen will
be displayed, and you can operate the system using the screen.
● Transfer method and operation may vary according to the mobile phone used.
● For operation of the mobile phone in use, see the phone's manual.
■ To send a tone by speed tone
Touch
displayed.
and touch
■ While driving
Key input is unavailable.
426
. Choose the desired number from the speed tone list
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Setting the hands-free system
You can speed dial, register in and edit the phone book, and set the
Bluetooth® phone.
Connection
Method
3
Interior features
To display the screen shown above, press
“Information” screen, and touch
, touch
on the
on the “Telephone” screen.
427
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Registering/Deleting a speed dial item
■ Registering a speed dial item
You can register a number from the phone book or the call history. Up
to 17 entries may be stored.
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
STEP 6
428
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
Touch
in the “Speed
Dial” section of the “Speed Dial
Settings” screen.
Select the data to be registered.
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
STEP 7
Select the number to be registered.
STEP 8
Touch the desired switch.
The last dialed number will be registered in position 6.
3
Interior features
■ Deleting a speed dial item
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
Touch
in the “Speed Dial” section of the “Speed Dial
Settings” screen.
Select the data to be deleted, and a confirmation message will be
displayed.
If everything is correct, touch
.
STEP 6
STEP 7
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
429
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
■ To delete all speed dial items
Follow the steps for “Deleting a speed dial item” until “STEP 5”. In the “Speed Dial”
section of the “Speed Dial Settings” screen, touch
. A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, touch
.
Registering/Editing/Deleting a speed tone
■ Registering a speed tone
You can register up to 6 items.
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
STEP 5
Touch
Tone” section.
in the “Speed
STEP 6
Input the desired name and touch
.
,
: Letter input
: Number/Symbol input
: Space
: Backspace
430
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Input the number and touch
STEP 7
.
Touch the desired switch.
STEP 8
3
Interior features
■ Editing a speed tone
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
Touch
in the “Speed Tone” section of the “Speed Dial
Settings” screen.
431
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Touch the switch to be edited.
STEP 6
STEP 7
Input the name and touch
STEP 8
Input the number and touch
.
.
■ Deleting a speed tone
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
Touch
in the “Speed Tone” section of the “Speed Dial
Settings” screen.
Choose the data to delete, and a confirmation message will be
displayed.
If everything is correct, touch
.
■ To delete all speed tone data
Follow the steps for “Deleting a speed tone” until “STEP 5”. In the “Speed Tone”
section, touch
. A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is
correct, touch
.
432
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Setting the volume
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
Touch
or
the volume.
STEP 5
to lower or raise
Voice volume:changes the
speaker volume
3
Interior features
Ring volume: changes the ring
volume
■ Adaptive volume control
When traveling at 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the system automatically raises the
volume one level.
If the vehicle’s speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h), the volume will return to its original level.
You can turn this function on/off by touching
.
■ To return to the default volume settings
Touch
, and then
.
433
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Changing the screen settings
The following settings can be changed:
● “Incoming Call Display”
The incoming call screen settings can be changed.
● “Auto Answer”
When a call is received, the system automatically switches to
the talking screen after the set
period of time, meaning you
can speak without pressing anything.
● “Show Bluetooth* connection
status at startup”
You can set the system to show
the status confirmation display
when connecting.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
434
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
■ “Incoming Call Display” settings
STEP 1
Press
.
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
Select the desired switch.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
: The hands-free screen is displayed when a call is
received, and you can operate the system from that
screen.
■ “Auto Answer” settings
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
STEP 6
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
Touch
in the “Auto Answer” section of the “Screen
Settings” screen.
Set the wait time using
and
. (1 - 60 seconds)
435
Interior features
: A message is displayed at the top of the screen, and
you can only operate the system with the steering
switches.
3
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
■ “Show Bluetooth* connection status at startup” settings
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
Touch
/
in the “Show Bluetooth* connection
status at startup” section of the “Screen Settings” screen.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
■ To set the screen settings to default
Touch
436
, and then
.
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Phone book settings
Up to 1000 names, 2 items per name, can be registered.
■ Transferring mobile phone data
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
Touch
.
STEP 6
Select the group to transfer to.
3
Interior features
STEP 5
437
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
To
STEP 7
overwrite
.
data,
touch
To add to existing data, touch
.
Transfer will begin. If you wish to
cancel the transfer before it is fin-
STEP 8
ished, touch
.
Transfer is complete when
“Transfer completed” is displayed.
If “Transfer failed” is displayed,
restart the process from the beginning.
■ Registering by input
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
438
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
Touch
section.
in the “Phone Book”
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
STEP 6
Choose the switch to register.
: Input the name on the
“Name” screen.
and
:
Input the number(s) on
the
“Telephone
Number” screen. When
you touch
, the
“Select Icon” screen will
appear.
Choose the desired
icon.
•
•
•
•
•
3
: Select the desired phone
number and touch
to record a
voice tag.
To play the voice tag,
touch
. To
delete the voice tag,
touch
.
STEP 7
Once input is complete, touch
.
439
Interior features
: Select the desired group
from the “Select Group”
screen. (No Group, 01 09)
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
■ Adding call history data to a registered entry
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
on the “Telephone” screen.
Choose the desired number from the list.
STEP 4
.
on the “Information” screen.
To choose from the incoming call history, touch
desired number.
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
440
Touch
and select the
.
Choose the phone book entry to be added to.
Check the data to be added, and touch
.
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
■ Editing phone book data
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
STEP 8
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
Touch
in the “Phone Book” section of the “Phone Book
Management” screen.
Choose the data to edit.
Choose the switch to edit.
After editing, touch
.
Interior features
■ Deleting phone book data
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
Touch
in the “Phone Book” section of the “Phone Book
Management” screen.
Select the data to delete.
A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct,
touch
.
STEP 6
STEP 7
3
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
441
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
■ To delete all data
Follow the steps for “Deleting phone book data” until “STEP 5”. In the “Phone
Book” section of the “Phone Book Management” screen, touch
. To delete
all data within a group, touch
, and select the group to delete. To delete
all contact data, touch
. Check that everything is correct, and touch
.
■ Registering/Editing/Deleting from the phone book
You can register data in the phone book, edit registered data, and delete items.
STEP 1 Press
STEP 2 Touch
STEP 3 Touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
STEP 4 To register data, touch
on the “Phone Book” screen.
To delete all data, touch
.
To delete or edit specific data, select the data to delete/edit, and touch
to delete, or
to edit.
■ The phone book
The method for transferring phone book data from the phone to the system varies
with phone model. See the phone’s manual.
442
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Changing the phone book group name settings
■ Registering a group name
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
Touch
in the “Group Name” section of the “Phone Book
Management” screen.
Select the group to register (“01” - “19”).
Select the switch to be edited.
STEP 6
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
: The below screen will be
displayed.
Select
the
desired icon.
: Input the name on the
“Name” screen.
STEP 8
Once editing is complete, touch
.
443
3
Interior features
STEP 7
.
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
■ Deleting a group name
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
Touch
in the “Group Name” section of the “Phone
Book Management” screen.
Select the group name to delete, and a confirmation message will
be displayed.
If everything is correct, touch
.
■ To delete all data
Follow the steps for “Deleting phone book data” until to “STEP 5”. In the “Phone
Book” section of the “Phone Book Management” screen, touch
. A
confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, touch
.
444
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Deleting the history
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
on the “Telephone” screen.
Select the data to delete from the list.
STEP 4
.
on the “Information” screen.
To delete data from the incoming call history, touch
the data to delete.
Touch
STEP 5
, and select
.
3
Interior features
STEP 6
Check that everything is correct, and touch
.
■ To delete all data
Follow the steps for “Deleting a group name” until “STEP 4”. Touch
on the
“Outgoing Calls” screen. To delete all incoming call history data, touch
,
and touch
. Check that everything is correct, and touch
.
Changing the security settings
You can disable certain hands-free system functions. Use the security settings when you do not wish other people to see the registered data, for
example when having the vehicle valet parked at a hotel.
To enable or disable security, the security code (4 digits) is required. The
default code is “0000”. Be sure to change the security code before use.
445
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
■ Changing the security code
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
STEP 5
Touch
in
“Security Code” section.
STEP 6
Input the current security code,
and touch
.
STEP 7
STEP 8
446
Input the new security code, and touch
message will appear.
If everything is correct, touch
.
the
. A confirmation
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
■ Enabling security
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
STEP 6
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
Touch
in the “Phone Book Lock” section of the “Phone
Book Lock” screen.
Input the security code, and touch
.
■ Setting the security code to default
3
Interior features
STEP 1
Press
.
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
Touch
STEP 6
Input the security code on the “Security Code” screen, and touch
STEP 7
. A confirmation message will appear.
If everything is correct, touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
on the “Phone Book Lock” screen.
447
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
■ If “Phone Book Lock” is set
If the security code is input and “Phone Book Lock” is set, the following functions
are locked:
● Display of the phone book screen and transferring, registering, editing and
deleting the phone book data.
● Display of the speed dial screen, registering, deleting the speed dial and speed
dialing.
● Display of the other party's name for calls being received or made.
● Display of the dialed numbers screen and incoming call screen, deleting the
dialed numbers and received numbers
● Display of the phone information screen.
● Changing the security code.
The speed dial screen is not displayed while driving.
■ When changing the security code
● Be sure to choose a number difficult for strangers to guess.
● Do not forget the security code. Even your Lexus dealer will be unable to dis-
able the security. If you do forget the code, initialize all personal data.
(P. 241)
448
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Setting a Bluetooth® phone
■ Selecting a Bluetooth® phone
If multiple Bluetooth® phones are registered, follow the procedure
below to select the Bluetooth® phone to be used. You may only use
one phone at a time.
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
3
Touch
.
STEP 5
Select the phone to be used, and
Interior features
STEP 4
touch
.
If no phones are registered,
“Empty” will be displayed.
If
“Bluetooth*
connection
successful”
is
displayed,
registration was successful.
If another Bluetooth® phone is
already connected, a confirmation
message is displayed. Touch
or
.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
449
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
■ Displaying Bluetooth® information
You can check the device address and device name.
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
Touch
on the “Settings” screen.
On the “Select Telephone” screen, select the desired phone and
touch
.
To change the device name, touch
in the “Device Name” section, and input the name on the
“Name” screen (max. 20 characters).
■ To change the Bluetooth® settings
You can change the device name and passkey.
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
450
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
To change the device name, touch
in the “Device Name” section, and input the name on the
“Name” screen (max. 20 characters).
STEP 5
To change the passkey, touch
in the “Passkey” section,
and input 4 - 8 digits on the
“Passkey” screen.
■ Setting the Bluetooth® settings to default
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
STEP 6
.
3
on the “Information” screen.
Interior features
STEP 1
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
Touch
on the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen, and a confirmation message will be displayed.
If everything is correct, touch
.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
451
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
■ To delete the Bluetooth® settings
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
STEP 6
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
Touch
in the “Bluetooth* Telephone” section of the
“Bluetooth* Settings” screen.
On the “Delete Telephone” screen, select the phone to delete.
To check the device address, touch
STEP 7
.
If you touch
, a confirmation message is displayed. If everything is correct, touch
.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
452
3-6. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Your Lexus is equipped with the illuminated entry system to assist in entering the vehicle. Owing to the function of the system, the lights shown in the
following illustration automatically turn on/off according to the presence of
the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, whether the
doors are opened/closed, and the “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode.
3
Interior features
Front personal lights (P. 454)
Front interior lights (P. 454)
Inside door handle lighting
Rear personal lights ( P. 454)
Rear interior light
Door courtesy lighting
Shift lever lighting (when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode)
453
3-6. Using the interior lights
Interior lights and personal lights
Seat belt buckle lighting
“ENGINE START STOP” switch lighting
Footwell lighting
Outer foot lights
Interior lights
“OFF”
Door position on/off
“ON”
Personal lights
Front
On/off
454
3-6. Using the interior lights
Personal lights
Rear (without rear seat entertainment system)
On/off
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
If the interior lights remain on when the door is not fully closed and the interior light
switch (door position on/ off) is on, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 692)
455
3
Interior features
Rear (with rear seat entertainment system)
On/off
Press the knob to release it, and
turn the knob to the desired
brightness.
Darker
Brighter
3-7. Using the storage features
List of storage features
5-seat models (type A)
Glove box
Auxiliary boxes
Door pockets
Cool box/auxiliary box (if equipped)
Cup holders
Console box
Coin holder
456
3-7. Using the storage features
5-seat models (type B)
3
Interior features
Glove box
Auxiliary box
Door pockets
Cup holders
Console box
Coin holder
457
3-7. Using the storage features
4-seat models
Glove box
Auxiliary boxes
Door pockets
Cool box/auxiliary box
Cup holders
Console box
Coin holder
458
3-7. Using the storage features
Glove box
Glove box
Open (push button)
Lock with the mechanical key
Unlock with the mechanical key
■ Trunk opener main switch
3
The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. ( P. 53)
Interior features
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
459
3-7. Using the storage features
Coin holder
Coin holder
Press in the button.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the coin holder closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
460
3-7. Using the storage features
Door pockets
Door pockets (front)
The front door pockets can be
opened and closed.
CAUTION
3
■ Caution while driving
Interior features
Keep the door pockets closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
461
3-7. Using the storage features
Cup holders
Cup holders
Front
Press down and release the right
side of the cup holder lid.
Rear (type A for 5-seat models)
Press in and release the cup
holder.
Rear (type B for 5-seat models)
Pull up the cup holder lid.
462
3-7. Using the storage features
Cup holders
Rear (4-seat models)
Press in and release the button.
CAUTION
■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder
3
■ When not in use
Keep the cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
463
Interior features
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden
braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
3-7. Using the storage features
Console box
Console box
Slide the armrest while pushing
the knob.
Lift the armrest.
■ Tray in the console box
The tray can be raised backward.
■ Opening and closing assist function
When the console box is opened or closed partway, this function will apply force in
the appropriate direction, helping open or close the console box.
464
3-7. Using the storage features
Console box
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
NOTICE
■ Tray
Do not insert items exceeding the height of the tray. Doing so may prevent opening
and closing of the lid.
3
Interior features
465
3-7. Using the storage features
Cool box/auxiliary box
Cool box/auxiliary box (if equipped)
5-seat models
STEP 1
Pull down the armrest.
STEP 2
Pull the lever.
STEP 3
Open the cool air intake lid.
466
3-7. Using the storage features
Cool box/auxiliary box
4-seat models
STEP 1
Pull up the lever to release the lock
and lift the lid.
STEP 2
Open the cool air intake lid.
3
Interior features
467
3-7. Using the storage features
Cool box/auxiliary box
■ Operating conditions (cool box)
5-seat models
● The rear air conditioning system is on.
●
4-seat models
468
is displayed on the rear control
panel.
3-7. Using the storage features
Cool box/auxiliary box
■ Using a cool box as an auxiliary box
5-seat models
Close the cool air intake lid to turn off the
cool box system.
4-seat models
Close the cool air intake lid to turn off the
cool box system.
3
Interior features
■ Items unsuitable for the cool box
● Drinks in unsealed containers
● Fragile items, perishables or anything with strong odor
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Always keep the cool box closed to reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop.
469
3-7. Using the storage features
Auxiliary boxes
Auxiliary boxes
Overhead
Press in the button.
This box is useful for temporarily
storing sunglasses and similar small
items.
Rear seat (if equipped on 5-seat models)
Pull down the armrest.
STEP 1
STEP 2
470
Press the button to release the
lock.
Lift the lid.
3-7. Using the storage features
Auxiliary boxes
Rear seat (4-seat models)
Press in the lid.
This box is useful for storing DVD
discs and headphones.
CAUTION
3
■ Items that should not be left in the auxiliary box (overhead type)
■ Caution while driving
Do not leave the auxiliary box open while driving.
Items may fall out and cause death or serious injury in case of an accident or sudden
stop.
471
Interior features
Do not leave glasses or lighters in the box.
If the interior of the vehicle becomes hot, lighters may explode and glasses may
warp or crack.
3-8. Other interior features
Sun visors
Forward position:
Flip down.
Side position:
Flip down, unhook, and swing
to the side.
Side extender:
Place in side position, then
slide backward.
472
3-8. Other interior features
Vanity mirror
Front
Slide the cover to open.
The light turns on when the
cover is opened.
Rear
Press the button to open.
3
The vanity light turns on.
Interior features
NOTICE
■ When not in use
Keep the rear vanity mirror closed.
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the engine is stopped.
473
3-8. Other interior features
Clock
The clock is displayed when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. Perform the following steps to
adjust the clock.
Without touch screen
Adjusts the hour.
Adjusts the minutes.
Rounds to the nearest hour.*
*: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29  1:00
1:30 to 1:59  2:00
With touch screen (without navigation system)
474
3-8. Other interior features
Press “INFO”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Touch
.
STEP 3
Adjusts the hour.
Adjusts the minutes.
Rounds to the nearest hour.*
Turns daylight saving time on.
Turns daylight saving time off.
After setting, touch
.
3
Interior features
*: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29  1:00
1:30 to 1:59  2:00
With touch screen (with navigation system)
Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual.”
■ When the battery is disconnected
The time display will automatically be set to 1:00.
475
3-8. Other interior features
Outside temperature display
The displayed temperature ranges from -40°F (-40°C) up to 122°F
(50°C) when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
Without touch screen
With touch screen
■ When “” or “E” is displayed
The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
■ Display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or
the display may take longer than normal to change.
● When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a
garage, tunnel, etc.)
476
3-8. Other interior features
Ashtrays
Front
Push the front part of the lid to
open. Push the lid again to close.
To remove, pull the ashtray
upwards.
Rear
Open the ashtray lid.
To remove, pull the ashtray
upwards.
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■ When not in use
Keep the ashtray closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■ To prevent fire
● Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, then
make sure the ashtray is fully closed.
● Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.
477
3-8. Other interior features
Cigarette lighter
Front
Push the front part of the lid to
open, and push the cigarette
lighter down.
The cigarette lighter will pop up
when it is ready for use.
Rear (5-seat models)
Push the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter will pop out
when it is ready for use.
Rear (if equipped on 4-seat models)
Open the auxiliary box and
push the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter will pop out
when it is ready for use.
478
3-8. Other interior features
■ The cigarette lighter can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
CAUTION
■ To avoid burns or fires
● Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter.
● Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire.
● Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet.
■ When not in use
Keep the ashtray closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
3
Interior features
479
3-8. Other interior features
Power outlets
The power outlet can be used for a following component.
12 V: Accessories that run on less than 10 A.
115 VAC: Accessories that use less than 100 W.
Inside the console (12V)
Inside the armrest (12V)
On the back surface of the console (115VAC)
: If equipped on 4-seat models
480
3-8. Other interior features
■ The power outlet can be used when
12 V
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
115 VAC
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
3
Interior features
■ To prevent the fuse from being blown
12 V
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
115 VAC
Do not use a 115 VAC appliance that requires more than 100 W.
If a 115 VAC appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the protection
circuit will cut the power supply.
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
■ Appliances that may not operate properly (115 VAC)
The following 115 VAC appliances may not operate properly even if their power
consumption is under 100 W.
● Appliances with high initial peak wattage
● Measuring devices that process precise data
● Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply
481
3-8. Other interior features
Heated steering wheel
The heated steering wheel can be used to heat the leather portion of the
steering wheel.
On/off
The indicator light comes on
when the heater is operating.
■ Operating condition
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Timer
The heated steering wheel will automatically turn off after about 30 minutes.
■ If the indicator light flashes
Press the button to turn the heated steering wheel off and then press the button
again. If the indicator light still flashes, a malfunction may be occurring. Turn the
heated steering wheel off and have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
: If equipped
482
3-8. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ Burns
Only appropriately qualified and capable non-impaired persons should operate the
vehicle. However, care should be taken to prevent injury if anyone in the following
categories comes into contact with the steering wheel when the heated steering
wheel is on:
● Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled
● Persons with sensitive skin
● Persons who are fatigued
● Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold
remedies, etc.)
3
Interior features
NOTICE
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
Turn the switch off when the engine is not running.
483
3-8. Other interior features
Climate control seats/seat heaters
The temperature of the seats can be adjusted individually.
■ Front climate control seats
Press the knob to release it,
and turn the knob to the
desired temperature setting.
Off
Press the knob to lock it when
not in use.
Ventilation
Cool air
Warm air
: If equipped
484
3-8. Other interior features
■ Rear climate control seats
5-seat models
Press the knob to turn the
system on, and turn the knob
to the desired temperature
setting.
Press the knob again to turn the
system off.
Ventilation
Cool air
Warm air
3
4-seat models
Interior features
The rear climate control seats
can also be turned on and off
from the front seats.
485
3-8. Other interior features
■ Rear seat heaters
Press the knob to turn the system on, and turn the knob to the
desired temperature setting.
The further you turn the knob
clockwise, the warmer the seat
temperature becomes. Press
the knob again to turn the system off.
The rear seat heaters can also
be turned on and off from the
front seats.
■ Operating condition
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Replacing the air filters
Filters are installed in the climate control seats. For replacement of the filters, contact your Lexus dealer.
486
3-8. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ Burns/excessive cooling
● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat to avoid the possibility of
burns or excessive cooling:
• Babies, small children, elderly persons, sick persons and persons with a physical disability
• Persons who have sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs which induce sleep, such as sleeping drugs and cold remedies
● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the climate control seat or seat
heater. Using the climate control seat or seat heater with a blanket or cushion
may increase or decrease the temperature of the seat, resulting in overheating or
overcooling.
may cool the occupants excessively or may cause minor burns or overheating.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the climate control seat and seat heater
Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick
sharp objects, such as needles and nails, into the seat.
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not leave the system on longer than necessary when the engine is off.
487
Interior features
● Do not use the climate control seat or seat heater more than necessary. Doing so
3
3-8. Other interior features
Armrest (5-seat models)
Pull the armrest down for use.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not place too much strain on the armrest.
488
3-8. Other interior features
Rear seat relaxation system (4-seat models)
Pneumatic chambers and vibration units built into the right-hand rear seat
provide the occupant with 3 speeds and intensities of pressure and 7
speeds of vibration.
3
Interior features
ON/OFF - turns the system on and off
If no buttons are selected for about 3 minutes, the system will automatically turn off.
SHIATSU - starts the SHIATSU program
STRETCH - starts the STRETCH program
SHOULDER - starts manual operation for the upper back
BACK - starts manual operation for the lower back
INTENSITY - adjusts the intensity of air pressure
SPEED - adjusts the speed of the air unit
VIB. - turns the vibration on and off
489
3-8. Other interior features
VIB. SPEED - adjusts the vibration speed.
The vibration function can be operated along with the SHIATSU,
STRETCH, BACK or SHOULDER function. If these functions are operated together, pressing either the VIB. button or the previously selected
button (SHIATSU, STRETCH, BACK or SHOULDER) stops the corresponding operation.
■ Operating condition
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Programmed operations
● SHIATSU
Partial pressure for the whole back
● STRETCH
Stretches and relaxation of the whole back
■ Timer function
Each operation will automatically stop about 15 minutes after it starts.
CAUTION
■ Using the rear seat relaxation system
● Those who are pregnant, have recently given birth, or suffer from ailments requir-
ing rest (heart disease etc.) should consult a doctor before use.
● Do not allow children to use the relaxation function.
● Do not use immediately after a meal or for an extended period of time.
● If you feel sick while using the relaxation function, immediately discontinue use.
490
3-8. Other interior features
Retractable table (4-seat models)
STEP 1
Slide the lever to raise the table.
STEP 2
Pull the table up and pull down
the table.
3
Interior features
The position of the table can be
changed. Before using the table,
make sure that the table is
securely locked.
When the table is in use, the
front seats will stop if they are
going to contact the table.
(P. 62)
When returning the table, pull it
up while pulling the lock release
lever.
491
3-8. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ When not in use
To avoid injury, return the table.
■ Caution while driving
Keep the table stowed properly in its place. In the event of an accident, contact with
the table may result in death or serious injury.
■ When using the table
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious
injury.
● Make sure the table is securely locked.
● Do not lean on the table.
● Do not put anything heavier than 22 lb. (10 kg) on the table.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the table
Do not place too much strain on the table.
492
3-8. Other interior features
Rear sunshade
The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered by operating any of the buttons shown below.
From front seat
Extend/retract
3
From rear seat (5-seat models)
Interior features
Extend/retract
From rear seat (4-seat models)
Extend/retract
: If equipped
493
3-8. Other interior features
■ The rear sunshade can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Operating the rear sunshade after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
OFF
The rear sunshade can be operated for approximately 60 seconds even after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF.
■ Reverse operation feature
To ensure adequate rear visibility, the rear sunshade automatically lowers when the
shift lever is shifted to “R”.
However, the rear sunshade is raised again if any of the following occurs:
● The button is pressed again.
● The shift lever is shifted to “P”.
● The shift lever is shifted out of “P” and “R”, and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9
mph (15 km/h).
If the engine is turned off when the rear sunshade has been lowered due to the
reverse operation feature, it will not be raised even when the engine is turned on
again and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). To raise the sunshade
again, press the button.
■ Button lock function
To prevent inadvertent operation, some buttons on the rear armrest can be locked.
(P. 277)
CAUTION
■ When the rear sunshade is being raised or lowered
Do not place fingers or other objects in the shade mechanism or in the opening as
injury may result.
494
3-8. Other interior features
NOTICE
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not operate the rear sunshade when the engine is not running.
■ To ensure normal operation of the sunshade
Observe the following precautions:
● Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components.
● Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations.
● Do not attach items to the rear sunshade.
● Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions.
● Do not operate the rear sunshade continuously for long periods of time.
3
Interior features
495
3-8. Other interior features
Rear door sunshades
The rear door sunshades can be extended and retracted by operating any
of the buttons shown below.
From front seat
Extend/retract
The rear door sunshades can be
extended only when both of left
and right rear door sunshades
are retracted. Pressing the button with either side retracted will
cause both sides to be retracted.
From rear seat (5-seat models)
Extend/retract
From rear seat (4-seat models)
Extend/retract
: If equipped
496
3-8. Other interior features
■ Operating conditions
● The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
● The rear windows are fully closed.
The rear door sunshades automatically retract when the rear windows are
opened.
■ Operating the rear door sunshades after turning the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch OFF
The rear door sunshades can be operated for approximately 60 seconds even after
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF.
■ Jam protection function
If the jam protection function operates when extending the rear door sunshades
Pressing the button will reconnect the sunshade.
Pressing the button again will allow the sunshades to be operated.
If the sunshade does not operate after the button is pressed, press the button again.
If the jam protection function operates when retracting the rear door sunshades
Press and hold the button to re-extend the rear door sunshades, and continue
pressing for more than 5 seconds after the sunshades have fully extended and
stopped.
■ Button lock function
To prevent inadvertent operation, some buttons on the rear armrest can be locked.
(P. 277)
■ When reconnecting the battery
The rear door sunshades will always be retracted the first time the button is pressed.
497
3
Interior features
If an object becomes caught between a rear door sunshade and the window frame,
the jam protection function will cause the sunshade to detach from its drive mechanism and retract.
3-8. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ When the rear door sunshades are being extended or retracted
Do not place fingers or other objects in the shade mechanism or in the opening as
injury may result.
■ Jam protection function
Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
NOTICE
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not operate the rear door sunshades when the engine is not running.
■ To ensure normal operation of the sunshades
Observe the following precautions:
● Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components.
● Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations.
● Do not attach items to the rear door sunshades.
● Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions.
● Do not operate the rear door sunshades continuously for long periods of time.
498
3-8. Other interior features
Trunk storage extension
Long objects can be loaded in the vehicle by utilizing the trunk space and
rear seat area.
STEP 1
Pull down the rear seat armrest.
STEP 2
Open the armrest door.
3
Lock
Unlock
: If equipped
499
Interior features
The armrest door can be locked
and unlocked using the
mechanical key.
3-8. Other interior features
Opening from the cabin
STEP 3
Open the inside trunk door
from the cabin, and load baggage or other items.
Opening from the trunk
STEP 3
Open the inside trunk door
from the trunk, and load baggage or other items.
CAUTION
■ When not in use
Ensure that the inside trunk door is closed.
In the event of sudden braking, items stored in the trunk may be thrown forward into
the cabin, resulting in injury.
500
3-8. Other interior features
Coat hooks
Without rear air conditioning system
To use the coat hook, push it on.
With rear air conditioning system
To use the coat hook, push it on.
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■ Items that must not be hung on the hook
Do not hang a coat hanger or other hard or sharp object on the hook. If the SRS
curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles that cause death
or serious injury.
501
3-8. Other interior features
Floor mat
Securely place a mat that matches the size of the space on the carpet.
Secure the floor mat using the
hooks provided.
CAUTION
■ When inserting the floor mat
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in the floor mat slipping and interfering with the movement of the pedals during driving, resulting in an accident.
● Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the vehicle carpet and the correct
side faces upward.
● Do not place floor mats on top of existing mats.
502
3-8. Other interior features
Trunk features
■ Cargo net
The cargo net is provided for
securing loose items on the
floor or items inside the trunk.
Raise the cargo hooks on the
floor. Hook the net on the cargo
hooks.
3
Interior features
■ Shopping bag hooks
503
3-8. Other interior features
■ First-aid kit storage belt
Loosen
Tighten
■ Luggage mat
Pull the hook upwards when lifting the luggage mat up.
The hook can be hooked on the
edge of the trunk.
504
3-8. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ When the cargo net is not in use
To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks on the floor to their stowed positions.
NOTICE
■ When closing the trunk
Do not leave the luggage mat hook hooked on the edge of the trunk.
The luggage mat may get damaged.
3
Interior features
505
3-8. Other interior features
Garage door opener
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors,
gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, and security systems,
and other devices.
The garage door opener (HomeLink Universal Transceiver) is manufactured
under license from HomeLink.
Programming the HomeLink (for U.S.A. owners)
The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming method below appropriate for the device.
Indicator
Buttons
■ Programming the HomeLink
STEP 1
Point the remote control transmitter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to
75 mm) from the HomeLink
control buttons.
Keep the HomeLink indicator
light in view while programming.
506
3-8. Other interior features
STEP 2
Press and hold one of the
HomeLink buttons and the transmitter button. When the
HomeLink
indicator
light
changes from a slow to a rapid
flash, you can release both buttons.
If the HomeLink indicator light
comes on but does not flash,
flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and
remains lit, the HomeLink button
is already programmed. Use the
other buttons or follow the “Reprogramming a HomeLink button”
instructions. (P. 509)
Test the HomeLink operation by
pressing the newly programmed
button.
If a HomeLink button has been
programmed for a garage door,
check to see if the garage door
opens and closes. If the garage
door does not operate, see if your
remote control transmitter is of the
rolling code type. Press and hold
the programmed HomeLink button. The remote control transmitter
is of the rolling code type if the
HomeLink indicator light flashes
rapidly for 2 seconds and then
remains lit. If your transmitter is of
the rolling code type, proceed to
the heading “Programming a rolling code system”.
STEP 4
Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink buttons.
507
Interior features
STEP 3
3
3-8. Other interior features
■ Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S.A. owners)
If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the
heading “Programming the HomeLink” before proceeding with the
steps listed below.
STEP 1
Locate the training button on the ceiling mounted garage door
opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by brand of garage door opener motor.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener
for the location of the training button.
STEP 2
Press the training button.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3
below.
STEP 3
Press and hold the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink button for
2 seconds and release it. Repeat this step once again. The garage
door may open.
If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the
door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third
press and release will complete the programming process by opening
the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize
the HomeLink signal and operate the garage door.
Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system
for any of the remaining HomeLink buttons.
■ Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming all
devices in the Canadian market
STEP 1 Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the surface of the HomeLink.
STEP 4
Keep the HomeLink indicator light in view while programming.
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
508
Press and hold the selected HomeLink button.
Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control
button for two seconds each until step 4 is completed.
When the indicator light on the HomeLink compatible transceiver starts to flash rapidly, release the buttons.
3-8. Other interior features
Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.
STEP 6 Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink buttons.
■ Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems, home door
locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance.
STEP 5
■ Reprogramming a button
The individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased but can be
reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Reprogramming a
HomeLink button” instructions.
Press the appropriate HomeLink button. The HomeLink indicator
light should turn on.
The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle continues to send a
signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.
Reprogramming a HomeLink button
Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. After 20 seconds, the
HomeLink indicator light will start flashing slowly. Next, while still pressing and holding the HomeLink button, press and hold the button on the
transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a
rapid flash.
509
Interior features
Operating HomeLink
3
3-8. Other interior features
Erasing the entire HomeLink memory (all three programs)
Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink memory.
■ Before programming
● Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.
● The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away from
the HomeLink button.
■ Certification for the garage door opener
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of the IC
Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
510
3-8. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device
The garage door on other device may operate, so ensure people and objects are
out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■ Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink compatible transceiver with any garage door opener
or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety
standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an obstruction object. A door or
device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.
3
Interior features
511
3-8. Other interior features
Compass
The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which
the vehicle is heading.
■ Operation
To turn the compass on or off,
push and hold “AUTO” for 3
seconds.
■ Displays and directions
Display
Direction
N
North
NE
Northeast
E
East
SE
Southeast
S
South
SW
Southwest
W
West
NW
Northwest
: If equipped
512
3-8. Other interior features
Calibrating the compass
3
If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will deviate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following.
■ Deviation calibration
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle.
Push and hold “AUTO” for 6 secSTEP 2
onds.
A number (1 to 15) appears on the
compass display.
STEP 3
Press “AUTO”, and referring to the map above, select the number
of the zone where you are.
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is complete.
513
Interior features
The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the
earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the
geographic position of the vehicle.
3-8. Other interior features
■ Circling calibration
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle.
Push and hold “AUTO” for 12 secSTEP 2
onds.
“CAL” appears on the compass
display.
STEP 3
Drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/
h) or less in a circle until a direction
is displayed.
If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the
block until the direction is displayed.
■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:
● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
● The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interfer-
ence by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a
steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection,
near a large vehicle, etc.).
● The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)
● The battery has been disconnected.
● A door is open.
514
3-8. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ While driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
■ When doing the circling calibration
Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.
NOTICE
■ To avoid the compass malfunctions
3
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.
Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.
● Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's
magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows,
etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.
515
Interior features
■ To ensure normal operation of the compass
3-8. Other interior features
Lexus Link System
The Lexus Link System is a communication service that uses the Global
Positioning System (GPS) data and cellular service to provide you with
safety, security and convenience. This system is only operational in GPS
and cellular coverage areas. Button operation and voice commands are
used to operate the system. To operate the system, follow the voice guidance instructions. For details about service and subscription, call the Lexus
Link Call Center at 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) (toll-free).
■ Buttons
Voice keypad button
Volume control
Phone button
“SERVICES” button
Emergency button
■ Services
The Lexus Link System offers the following services:
● Airbag deployment notification (P. 518)
● Emergency assistance (P. 519)
● Stolen vehicle location assistance (P. 519)
● Remote horn/lights and remote door lock/unlock (P. 520)
● Advisor record (P. 521)
● Personal calling (P. 521)
● Other services (P. 520)
Operating the Lexus Link System during a Bluetooth® phone call will terminate the Bluetooth phone call.
: If equipped
516
3-8. Other interior features
Safety information for the Lexus Link System
Important! Read this information before using the Lexus Link System.
■ Exposure to radio frequency signals
The Lexus Link System to be installed in your vehicle is a low power radio
transmitter and receiver. When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
IGNITION ON mode, it receives and also sends out radio frequency
(RF) signals.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless
phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies.
3
● ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
● ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) [1996]
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations
of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and
physicians from universities, government health agencies, and industry
reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard
(C95.1).
The design of the Lexus Link System complies with the FCC guidelines in
addition to those standards.
517
Interior features
● NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement)
Report 86 [1986]
3-8. Other interior features
Indicator and warning lights
Operation indicator light
The operation indicator light will go
off a short time after your subscription expired.
Warning light
If the warning light (red light)
comes on, have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Airbag deployment notification
If an airbag deploys, an emergency call is automatically placed to the
Lexus Link Call Center, and your vehicle's location is identified. The
Lexus Link Advisor will attempt to contact you and assess the situation.
The Advisor can quickly contact the nearest emergency services provider, describe the situation and request that assistance be sent to your
location.
The Lexus Link Advisor can, if requested, connect you to an emergency services operator.
518
3-8. Other interior features
Emergency assistance
When you press
button, a priority call is placed to the Lexus Link
Call Center with your vehicle's location. At the Call Center, the Lexus
Link Advisor can determine your vehicle's location, communicate with
you, and, if appropriate, contact the nearest emergency service provider.
If you have accidentally pressed the button, tell the Lexus Link Advisor that
you are not experiencing an emergency.
Stolen vehicle location assistance
If your vehicle is stolen, call the Lexus Link Call Center at 1-800-25LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) (toll-free) and select the option for Lexus
Link.
519
Interior features
To protect subscribers' privacy, the location of a vehicle will not be provided
to anyone other than a law enforcement authority.
3
3-8. Other interior features
Remote horn/lights and remote door lock/unlock
The remote operations are performed by contacting the Lexus Link Call
Center from the outside of the vehicle. When necessary, call the Lexus
Link Call Center at 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) (toll-free)
and select the option for Lexus Link.
● If you forget to lock the vehicle or you are locked out, the Lexus Link
Call Center can send a signal to lock or unlock the vehicle remotely.
● If you forget where you parked the vehicle, such as in a large parking
lot, the Lexus Link Call Center can send a signal to flash the headlights
and sound the horn to help you locate the vehicle.
When contacting the Lexus Link Call Center from the outside of the vehicle,
you need the Lexus Link PIN (Personal Identification Number). Write the PIN
down and carry it with you.
Ability to locate stolen vehicles and lock/unlock doors and activate horn/
lights will vary with conditions. Lexus Link is unable to remotely lock doors
when the electronic key is in left inside the vehicle and is unable to remotely
unlock doors when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY
or IGNITION ON mode.
Other services
Press
in the vehicle or call the Lexus Link Call Center at 1-80025-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) (toll-free), and then select the option for
Lexus Link. The services provided will depend on the service plan level.
520
3-8. Other interior features
Advisor record
■ Recording a conversation with an advisor
Press
to record a conversation. To stop recording, press
again.
• Up to 2 minutes of recording time is available.
• Recording a new conversation deletes the previously recorded conversation.
■ Playing the recorded conversation
STEP 1 Press
or
.
STEP 2 Say “Advisor playback”.
Press the button again to stop the playback.
To restart the playback, press
, say “Advisor playback” and then
select either of the following methods.
3
• Say “Resume” to resume the playback.
• Say “Play” to start from the beginning.
Interior features
Personal calling from OEM telematic services
The Lexus Link System provides access to personal calling, a hands-free
phone service provided by OEM telematic services. You can purchase a
package of minutes that works best for you. As you make and receive
calls, minutes are deducted from your plan. They are easily billed to a
credit card that is kept on file so no separate phone bill is needed.
Personal calling universal voice recognition commands:
• “Help” The system will provide a list of available commands.
• “Clear” When you are entering digits, this command will erase the last
digit entered.
• “Cancel” This command takes you from the current function to the “Lexus
Link ready” prompt. If the last response from the system was “Lexus Link
ready”, this command will exit voice mode.
521
3-8. Other interior features
Voice recognition command error message:
• “Pardon” The system responds with this message if the system does not
recognize your voice command properly. Say the command slowly again.
After the third time this happens, the system will try to guess the command
you are requesting. If correct, say “Yes”. If not, say “No”, and the system will
prompt you with its next-best guess.
• “Slower please” The system responds with this message if you say a command before the system is ready to listen or if your voice command cannot
be recognized because of substantial background noise. Try to wait
slightly longer before speaking.
■ There are 5 ways to make a call.
Dialing a specific phone number
STEP 1 Press
. When the system responds with “Lexus Link ready”,
say “Dial”.
STEP 2 When the system responds with “Phone number to dial please”,
say the entire number you wish to dial without pausing.
STEP 3 The system will repeat the number and ask “Yes or No”.
STEP 4 Say “Yes” (or “No” to try again).
STEP 5 The system responds with “Dialing” (your call will then be connected).
Dialing digit-by-digit (“Digit Dial”)
“Digit Dial” enables you to dial a phone number by individual digit. This is
helpful when there is background noise and also improves voice recognition.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
522
Press
. When the system responds with “Lexus Link ready”,
say “Digit Dial”.
When the system responds with “Digit please”, say the first digit
of the number to be dialed and wait for it to be repeated back to
you.
Continue one digit at a time until all digits are entered.
3-8. Other interior features
STEP 4
When finished, say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dialing” and
your call is placed.
If you have problems storing a number using the continuous number
method, you can store numbers one digit at a time using “Digit Store”.
Simply follow the instructions above for “Digit Dial”, except say “Digit
Store” in STEP 1 and “Store” in STEP 4.
Dialing a phone number saved as a nametag
A nametag is a convenient way to store important or frequently called
phone numbers for easy access at any time. To do this, choose a frequently -called number to store, the example below uses your home telephone number.
● How to store a nametag
STEP 1
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
Press
. When the system responds with “Lexus Link ready”,
say “Store”.
When the system responds with “Phone number to store, please”,
say the entire number you wish to store with no pauses. The system will repeat the number and ask “Yes or No”.
Say “Yes” (or “No” to try again).
When the system responds with “Nametag, please”, say “My
home”.
When the system responds with “About to store my home. Does
that sound OK?”, say “Yes” (or “No” to try again).
The system responds with “Storing my home”.
-The system can store up to 20 nametags.
-Try to use multi-syllable nametags such as “my home”, and “the office”.
-Try to avoid similar-sounding nametags like “Tim” and “Kim”.
When using the “Dial” and “Store” commands, the system will recognize 7-, 10-, and 11-digit phone numbers. When dialing or storing a
phone number, you can say “zero” or “oh” for 0.
523
Interior features
STEP 2
3
3-8. Other interior features
● How to place a call using a stored nametag
Press
. When the system responds with “Lexus Link ready”,
say “Call”.
STEP 2 When the system responds with “Nametag, please”, say a
nametag.
STEP 3 The system responds with “Calling nametag”.
● How to hear a list of your stored nametags
STEP 1
Press
. When the system responds with “Lexus Link ready”,
say “Directory”.
STEP 2 The system will list your nametags.
Dialing the last number you called (“Redial”)
You can dial the last number you called by using the “Redial” feature.
STEP 1
Press
. When the system responds with “Lexus Link ready”,
say “Redial”.
STEP 2 The system will respond with “Redialing [#]”.
Dialing a number a Lexus Link Advisor downloaded to your vehicle
STEP 1 Press
. When the system responds with “Lexus Link ready”,
say “Number recall”.
STEP 2 The system will respond with “Connecting to number recall”.
■ Receiving a call
When someone calls you, you will hear a ring tone. Press
to
answer the call.
STEP 1
If you do not answer within 30 seconds, the system will terminate the incoming call.
■ Ending a call
When your call is finished, press
524
to end the call.
3-8. Other interior features
■ Accessing voicemail and sending number tones to an automated
phone system
You can access a voicemail system and respond to number request from
an automated phone system. When you receive the request for a number
while in a call, press
after saying the numbers one at a time, say
“Dial”.
If you do not say any commands within 5 seconds after pressing the button,
or if you press the button twice, the system cannot receive the number tones
you are trying to send. Press the button to try again.
■ Verifying remaining units (minutes)
To verify remaining minutes
STEP 1 Press
. When the system responds with “Lexus Link ready”,
say “Units”.
STEP 2 When the system responds with “Verify or add”, say “Verify”.
STEP 3 The system responds with “You have [#] units remaining”.
To add more calling units (minutes)
STEP 1 Press
. When the system responds with “Lexus Link ready”,
say “Units”.
STEP 2 When the system responds with “Verify or add”, say “Add”.
STEP 3 The system responds with “Connecting to the Personal Calling
Center”.
525
3
Interior features
■ How to retrieve your phone number
STEP 1 Press
. When the system responds with “Lexus Link ready”,
say “My number”.
STEP 2 The system responds with “Your number is [#]”.
If the response is “Personal calling unavailable”, this means your personal
calling feature is not yet active; this may take a few days from vehicle
delivery. It could also mean that personal calling service is not available in
your area. Press
to check with an Advisor. Now that you have your
number, take a moment to practice by making your first call to your home
phone. Remember, the system recognizes numbers better when you say
them quickly.
3-8. Other interior features
■ Security code/locking your system
The personal calling function can be locked using a 4-digit security code.
While the system is locked, it is only possible to communicate with the
Lexus Link Call Center.
To turn on/off the security
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Press
. When the system responds with “Lexus Link ready”,
say “Security”.
When the system responds with “Enter first digit of code please”,
say your 4-digit code one digit at a time.
After the fourth digit, the system responds with “Security (code
####) is now on/off”.
■ Speech recognition information
The Lexus Link speech recognition systems use speech technology that is designed
to understand a wide range of speakers of American English. However, the technology may not work as well if a regional or ethnic accent is encountered. If the speech
recognition system does not work properly, refer to the following:
● The system does not recognize your command properly if noise is present. Per-
form the following to improve voice command recognition.
•
•
•
•
Turn down or off the air conditioning system.
Slow down to reduce wind noise.
Close the windows and the moon roof to block outside noise.
Have all occupants be quiet so that the system does not recognize their conversation as a command.
● When to speak
Say a command within 5 seconds after the system prompts you to speak.
● How to speak
• Speak forcefully and clearly.
• Speak calmly and naturally.
• The driver should speak while facing forward, and the passenger should
speak facing the inside rear view mirror.
• Avoid speaking with a rising intonation. Use a flat or falling intonation.
526
3-8. Other interior features
● Tips for one-word commands
• The system recognizes only one word at a time for personal calling. (There
are some exceptions, such as “Advanced services” and “My number”.)
• When inputting the security codes or voice-activated keypad number, you
must say them one digit at a time. When inputting a phone number, the
speech recognition system can recognize 7-, 10-, and 11-digit numbers as well
as the number 911.
● Tips for entering a phone number using the “Dial” and “Store” commands
• Say each one of the syllables in the word clearly.
• Be sure to articulate each sound in the word.
• If the system is confusing 2 commands that are similar, be sure to pronounce
the distinction.
• Avoid clipping short words and syllables.
• Try speaking louder to prevent background noise from drowning out your
voice.
● Audible voice prompts
Some of the voice guidance instructions can be changed to Spanish. Press
and ask a Lexus Link Advisor.
527
3
Interior features
• You do not need to say “Dial”, “Store” or “Verify” after the phone number.
• If the phone number entered is not 7-, 10-, or 11-digits, use the “Dial” or
“Store” command.
• Do not pause between the digits.
• Speech recognition does not recognize the words “Hundred” or “Thousand”.
Instead, say each digit.
• Speech recognition often works better when the digits are combined
smoothly into a single phrase.
• If the system does not recognize your command properly, use the “Digit dial”
command to enter one digit at a time.
● If problems continue
3-8. Other interior features
■ Information on Advanced Services
See the Lexus Link area of the Lexus website at www.lexus.com/lexuslink/ or call
the Lexus Link Call Center at 1-800-255-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) (toll-free)
for more information.
■ Certification for the Lexus Link System
FCC ID: SCWTR-423-A2
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
■ FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications in construction not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Radio Frequency Exposure. This device is approved for Mobile Application only
and, to comply with applicable FCC radio frequency exposure regulations, must be
used with a distance of at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) between the antenna and the body of
any person at all time during use.
528
Maintenance and care
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior............ 530
Do-it-yourself service
precautions........................... 542
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior.............. 533
Hood.......................................... 545
Positioning a floor jack ......... 546
Engine compartment ........... 548
4-2. Maintenance
Tires............................................ 565
Maintenance
requirements ........................ 536
Tire inflation pressure........... 573
General maintenance ......... 538
Air conditioning filter ............ 579
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs................................. 541
Electronic key battery.......... 582
Wheels....................................... 577
Checking and replacing
fuses ........................................ 584
Headlight aim .......................... 601
Light bulbs................................ 603
529
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition:
● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt
and dust.
● Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.
● Wipe away any water.
● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
■ Automatic car washes
● Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle.
● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and
harm your vehicle’s paint.
■ High pressure car washes
● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the
windows.
● Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed prop-
erly.
■ Aluminum wheels
Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes
or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the same
mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
530
4-1. Maintenance and care
■ Bumpers and side moldings
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
■ To prevent deterioration and corrosion
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
•
•
•
•
•
After driving near the sea coast
After driving on salted roads
If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface
If you see dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings on the paint
After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron
powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
CAUTION
4
■ Caution about the exhaust pipes and rear bumper diffusers
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipes and diffusers until they
have cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipes and rear bumper diffusers
can cause burns.
NOTICE
■ To protect your vehicle’s painted surfaces
Do not use organic cleaners such as benzene or gasoline.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
● Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
531
Maintenance and care
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipes and rear bumper diffusers to become quite
hot.
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ When using an automatic car wash
Off
532
Set the wiper switch to off position.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers
may operate and the wiper blades may be
damaged.
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep
it in top condition:
■ Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces
with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
■ Cleaning the leather areas
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe
off all remaining traces of detergent.
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining
moisture. Allow the leather to dry in shaded and ventilated area.
● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge
or soft cloth.
● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt
and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
533
Maintenance and care
■ Synthetic leather areas
● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
4
4-1. Maintenance and care
■ Caring for leather areas
Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or
brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. Excellent
results are obtained when keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■ Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the
belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components, etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P. 110)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or severe injury.
534
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
● Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or
acidic solutions, dye, or bleach
● Seats: Acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, or alcohol
■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather
surfaces.
● Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park
the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as
they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.
■ Water on the floor
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window
● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to
the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with
lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes
running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
535
Maintenance and care
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into
contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also
cause the body to rust.
4
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular
checks. Lexus recommends the following maintenance.
■ General maintenance
Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself
or by a Lexus dealer.
■ Scheduled maintenance
Should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and Service Guide/Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance”.
■ Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
The use of Lexus Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s Guide”,
“Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”.
■ Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair
shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
536
4-2. Maintenance
■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer
● Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the
latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all
systems on your vehicle.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been
performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your
vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.
CAUTION
■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained
It could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.
■ Warning in handling of battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile com-
ponents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by compo-
● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (P. 561)
537
4
Maintenance and care
nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash
any affected area immediately.
4-2. Maintenance
General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed
at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Service Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice
should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service
shop for advice.
Engine compartment
Items
538
Check points
Battery
Maintenance-free?
(P. 561)
Brake fluid
At the correct level? (P. 559)
Engine coolant
At the correct level? (P. 557)
Engine oil
At the correct level? (P. 553)
Exhaust system
No fumes or strange sounds?
Radiator/condenser/hoses
Not blocked with foreign matter?
(P. 559)
Washer fluid
At the correct level? (P. 564)
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle interior
Items
Check points
Accelerator pedal
• Moves smoothly (without uneven
pedal effort or catching)?
Automatic transmission “Park”
mechanism
• Can the vehicle be held securely
on an incline with the shift lever in
P?
Brake pedal
• Moves smoothly?
• Does it have appropriate clearance
and correct amount of free play?
Brakes
• Not pull to one side when applied?
• Loss of brake effectiveness?
• Spongy feeling brake pedal?
• Pedal almost touches floor?
• Move smoothly and lock securely?
Indicators/buzzers
• Function properly?
Lights
• Do all the lights come on?
• Headlights aimed correctly?
(P. 601)
Parking brake
• Moves smoothly?
• Can hold the vehicle securely on
an incline?
Seat belts
• Does the seat belt system operate
smoothly?
• Are the belts undamaged?
Seats
• Do the seat controls operate properly?
Maintenance and care
Head restraints
4
539
4-2. Maintenance
Items
Steering wheel
Check points
• Moves smoothly?
• Has correct free play?
• No strange noises?
Vehicle exterior
Items
Check points
Door/trunk
• Operate smoothly?
Engine hood
• The lock system works properly?
Fluid leaks
• Is there any leakage after parking?
Tire
• Inflation pressure is correct?
• Tire surfaces not worn or damaged?
• Tires rotated according to the
maintenance schedule?
• Wheel nuts are not loose?
CAUTION
■ If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing
maintenance checks.
540
4-2. Maintenance
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include
OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in
the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test
and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service
the vehicle.
■ Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test:
● When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may
not be completely set.
● When the fuel tank cap is loose
4
Maintenance and care
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
■ When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the
vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
■ If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
541
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure given in these sections.
Items
Battery condition
Brake fluid level
Engine coolant level
542
Parts and tools
(P. 561)
• Warm water
• Baking soda
• Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
(P. 559)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding brake
fluid)
(P. 557)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine,
non-nitrite and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid
technology.
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and
50% deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and
45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine coolant)
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Items
Parts and tools
Engine oil level
(P. 553)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel, funnel (used
only for adding engine oil)
Fuses
(P. 584)
• Fuse with same amperage rating as
original
Headlight aim
(P. 601)
• Phillips-head screwdriver
Tire inflation pressure
(P. 573)
• Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
Radiator and condenser
(P. 559)

(P. 564)
• Water washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel
Washer fluid
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury,
observe the following precaution:
■ When working on the engine compartment
● Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fans and engine drive belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driv-
ing as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine
compartment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel
and battery fumes are flammable.
● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and
corrosive sulfuric acid.
543
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille
Be sure the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is OFF.
With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric
cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the
coolant temperature is high.
(P. 559)
■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting
in the eyes.
NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner
Driving with the air cleaners removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt
in the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
544
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
STEP 1
Pull the hood release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
4
Lift the auxiliary catch lever and
lift the hood.
CAUTION
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and
cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
545
Maintenance and care
STEP 2
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly.
Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
■ Front
2WD models
AWD models
■ Rear
546
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When raising your vehicle
Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or serious
injury:
● Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as
the one shown in the illustration.
● Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
● Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported only by
the floor jack.
Always use automotive jack stands on a solid, level surface.
4
● Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.
● Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the shift
● Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
● When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the
floor jack.
● Vehicles with electronically modulated air suspension:
Be sure to turn off the height control and stop the engine. Otherwise, the vehicle
height may change in the automatic leveling function. (P. 208)
547
Maintenance and care
lever in “P”.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment
2WD models
Battery
(P. 561)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 553)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 553)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 559)
Washer fluid tank
(P. 564)
548
Electric cooling fans
Condenser
(P. 559)
Radiator
(P. 559)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 557)
Fuse boxes
(P. 584)
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
AWD models
4
Electric cooling fans
Condenser
(P. 559)
Radiator
(P. 559)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 557)
Fuse boxes
(P. 584)
Maintenance and care
Battery
(P. 561)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 553)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 553)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 559)
Washer fluid tank
(P. 564)
549
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment cover
■ Removing the engine compartment covers
Outside
Front
■ Installing the clips
550
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Battery cover
■ Removing the battery cover
■ Installing the clips
Type A
4
Maintenance and care
Type B
551
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ When installing the battery cover
Securely install the cover over the battery. Failure to do so may cause water to enter
the engine compartment when it rains or the vehicle is washed, resulting in a malfunction.
552
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■ Checking the engine oil
STEP 1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine, wait
more than five minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of
the engine.
STEP 2 Hold a rag under the end and pull the dipstick out.
2WD models
4
Maintenance and care
AWD models
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the
oil level.
553
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 6
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Low
Full
■ Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the
low level mark, add engine oil of
the same type as already in the
engine.
554
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Engine oil
selection
Oil quantity
(Low  Full)
Items
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
P. 670
1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.)
Clean funnel
Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the filler cap, turning it clockwise.
■ Engine oil consumption
● The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the quality of
the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
4
● More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds, frequent
● A new engine consumes more oil.
● When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may
have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.
● Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp. qt./600 miles (1.0 L per 1000
km)
● If your vehicle consumes more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 Imp. qt.) every 600 miles
(1000 km), contact your Lexus dealer.
555
Maintenance and care
acceleration and deceleration.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ After changing the engine oil
The oil change system should be reset. Perform the following procedures:
STEP 1 Switch the display to the trip meter “A” when the engine is running.
(P. 167)
STEP 2 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
STEP 3 While pressing the trip meter reset button, set the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode (but do not start the engine
because otherwise the reset mode will be cancelled). Press and hold the
button until the multi-information display indicates that the reset is complete.
CAUTION
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin
disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid
prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dis-
pose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on regular basis.
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
556
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“FULL”
“LOW”
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line. (P. 660)
4
Visually check the radiator, hoses, coolant reservoir cap, drain cock and water
pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap and check for leaks in
the cooling systems.
557
Maintenance and care
■ If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50%
deionized water. (Enabled: -31F [-35C])
Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45%
deionized water. (Enabled: -44F [-42C])
For more details about engine coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ When the engine is hot
Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is
removed, causing burns or other injuries.
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water
and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection
and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it damaging parts or paint.
558
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser, and clear any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their
condition, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ The radiator and condenser may be hot after driving
Do not touch the radiator or condenser, as they may be hot and you may be burned.
Brake fluid
■ Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
Maintenance and care
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
■ Adding fluid
Fluid type
Items
4
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Clean funnel
559
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use
only newly opened brake fluid.
CAUTION
■ When filling the reservoir
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted
surfaces.
If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or
when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
560
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Battery
Check the battery as follows.
■ Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there
are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
■ Checking battery condition
Check the battery condition using the indicator color.
4
561
Maintenance and care
Blue: Good condition
White: Charging is necessary.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.
Red: Not working properly.
Have the battery checked by
your Lexus dealer.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Therefore, observe the following before recharging:
● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the
ground cable.
● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and discon-
necting the charger cables to the battery.
CAUTION
■ Chemicals in the battery
A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious
injury, take the following precautions while working on or near battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
● Keep children away from the battery.
■ Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or
closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
■ How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a
quicker rate.
562
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while
traveling to the nearest medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and
follow the procedure above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw
egg or vegetable oil. Get emergency medical attention immediately.
4
NOTICE
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.
■ When replacing the battery
Replace the battery with a battery of the same size.
Installing a battery of a different size will prevent the cover from being properly
installed over the battery. This may cause water to enter the engine compartment
when it rains or the vehicle is washed, resulting in a malfunction.
For more information about replacing the battery, contact your Lexus dealer.
563
Maintenance and care
■ When recharging the battery
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Washer fluid
If any washer does not work or the
warning message appears on the
multi-information display, the
washer tank may be empty. Add
washer fluid.
CAUTION
■ When refilling the washer fluid
Do not refill the washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the washer fluid
contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank.
564
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and
treadwear.
■ Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the “TWI” or
“” marks, etc., molded on the
sidewall of each tire.
Check spare tire condition and
pressure if not rotated.
■ Tire rotation
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
■ The tire pressure warning system
Your Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses
tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 629, 636)
565
Maintenance and care
Front
To equalize tire wear and extend
tire life, Lexus recommends that
tire rotation is carried out at the
same interval as tire inspection.
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed,
new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire pressure warning
system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (P. 568)
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized when the tire
inflation pressure is changed (such as when changing traveling
speed.)
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
pressure is set as the pressure benchmark.
566
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
STEP 1 Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF.
While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.
STEP 2
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. (P. 675)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on
this pressure level.
STEP 3
STEP 4
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Push and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the tire
pressure warning light blinks
slowly 3 times and a message
appears on the multi-information
display.
4
Maintenance and care
STEP 5
Wait a few minutes for the multi-information display to show the
tire inflation pressures (5 tires), and turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF.
567
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique
ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it
is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter. Have the ID code registered by your Lexus dealer.
■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the
fabric or bulges indicating internal damage.
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or
location of a cut or other damage.
If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.
■ Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered,
the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20
minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
■ Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if they
have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■ If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
■ If you push the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally
If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level
and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.
568
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases,
the settings has not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If
repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warn-
ing light does not flash 3 times and the setting message does not appear on the
multi-information display.
● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light
blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for about 20 minutes.
■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure
checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily
vehicle checks.
■ Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.
■ Tire types
1 Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving
under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered
or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires
is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
569
Maintenance and care
For the GAWR, see the Certification Label.
For the maximum load of the tire, see the load
limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
mentioned on the sidewall of the tire.
(P. 681)
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
2 All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with
snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration
and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
3 Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires.
If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original
equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install
studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction.
Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 228)
■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system
Initialize the tire pressure warning system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to
the specified level.
■ Tire pressure warning system certification
FCC ID: PAXPMV107J
FCC ID: HYQ13BCG
IC ID: 3729A-PMV107J
IC ID: 1551A-13BCG
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
570
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous
handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious
injury.
● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.
● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).
● Do not mix summer, all season and winter tires.
■ Using tires of a different size
Do not use tires of a different size from those equipped when the vehicle was new,
as the front tire steering angle setting is designed for the original tire size. It is dangerous to use an incorrect wheel and tire combination as this may result in reduced
vehicle stability.
4
■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system
571
Maintenance and care
Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light
may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when
the tire not inflation pressure is actually normal.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels and tire pressure warning valves and trans-
mitters
● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
● When replacing tires, make sure also to replace the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter grommets.
■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
■ Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the
tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■ If tire inflation pressures become low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
572
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire inflation pressure
■ Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. (P. 681)
Type A
4
Maintenance and care
573
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Type B
574
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
■ Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel efficiency
● Reduced driving comfort and tire life
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
575
4
Maintenance and care
STEP 6
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended levels, adjust inflate the tire.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and
adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
Reinstall the tire valve cap.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for
more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure
reading.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures
that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.
● Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the
tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.
CAUTION
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur
and result in an accident causing death or serious injury:
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Poor sealing of the tire bead
● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them as
soon as possible.
576
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling control.
■ Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they
are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim
width, and inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Lexus does not recommend using the following:
● Wheels of different sizes or types
● Used wheels
● Bent wheels that have been straightened
● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire
chains.
● Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a
plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
■ When replacing wheels
The wheels of your Lexus are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in
the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 566)
577
4
Maintenance and care
■ Aluminum wheel precautions
● Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with
your aluminum wheels.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the
Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.
Doing so may result in an accident, causing serious injury or death.
NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other
qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.
● Ensure that only Genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with nongenuine wheels.
578
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.
■ Front air conditioning filter
STEP 1 Set the air conditioning system to recirculated mode.
(P. 247, 257, 266)
The air conditioning filter case cannot be removed with the system in
the outside air mode.
STEP 2
STEP 3
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
Open the glove box. Lift and
remove the partition.
4
Remove the filter cover.
STEP 5
Remove the filter case.
Maintenance and care
STEP 4
579
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 6
Remove the air conditioning filter from the filter case and
replace it with a new one.
The UP marks shown on the
filter and the filter case should
be pointing up.
Reset the air conditioning filter maintenance data. (P. 581)
■ Rear air conditioning filter (if equipped)
STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
Open the trunk lid. Remove the
STEP 2
filter cover.
STEP 7
STEP 3
Remove the air conditioning filter and replace it with a new
one.
The UP marks shown on the
filter should be pointing up.
580
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Changing interval for the front air conditioning filter
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter when a message is appeared on the
multi-information display. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early
replacement may be required.
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
■ After changing the air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter maintenance data should be reset. Perform the following
procedures:
STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode.
STEP 2 Press and hold
(on the air conditioning panel) for 4 seconds or
more.
A buzzer will sound to indicate that the maintenance data has been successfully
reset.
■ Rear air conditioning filter (if equipped)
4
If it is necessary to clean or replace the filter, contact your Lexus dealer.
On vehicles with climate control seats, filters are installed in the seats. When it is
necessary to clean or replace the filters, contact your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
■ When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.
581
Maintenance and care
■ Climate control seat filter
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.
■ You will need the following items:
● Flathead screwdriver
● Small Phillips-head screwdriver
● Lithium battery (CR1632)
■ Replacing the battery
STEP 1
Take out the mechanical key.
STEP 2
Remove the cover.
STEP 3
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+”
terminal facing up.
582
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ If the electronic key battery is discharged
The following symptoms may occur:
● The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will
not function properly.
● The operational range is reduced.
■ Use a CR1632 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, jewelers, or camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufac-
turer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
■ When the card key battery needs to be replaced (if equipped)
The battery for the card key is available only at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus dealer
can replace the battery for you.
4
CAUTION
Maintenance and care
■ Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children.
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking.
NOTICE
■ For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
583
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown.
If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
STEP 2 Remove the engine compartment cover. (P. 550)
STEP 3 Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment (type A fuse box)
Push the tabs in and lift the lid
off.
STEP 1
Engine compartment (type B fuse box)
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
Driver's side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
584
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Passenger's side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
Trunk
Remove the lid.
4
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings”
for details about which fuse to check. (P. 588)
585
Maintenance and care
STEP 4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 5
Take out the pullout tool.
Only type A fuse can be
removed using the pullout tool.
Check if the fuse has blown.
Type A
STEP 6
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found
on the fuse box lid.
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found
on the fuse box lid.
586
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Lexus dealer.
Type D
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Lexus dealer.
4
Maintenance and care
587
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
■ Engine compartment (type A fuse box)
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
1
PTC HTR 3
25 A
PTC heater
2
PTC HTR 1
25 A
PTC heater
3
VSSR
5A
Electric power control system
4
ALT
180 A
AIR SUS, HTR, DEFOG, FAN NO.1,
H-LP CLN, PTC HTR 2, PTC HTR,
RR A/C, E/G RM1, D-J/B ALT,
P-J/B ALT, LUG-J/B ALT
5
PTC HTR
60 A
PTC HTR 1, PTC HTR 3
6
FAN NO.1
80 A
Electric cooling fans
7
E/G RM1
80 A
DEICER, WIP, E/G RM-IG1-1,
E/G RM-IG1-2, NV IR, FR FOG,
FR CTRL ALT, ABS MTR1
588
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
8
9
D-J/B ALT
P-J/B ALT
Ampere
Circuit
80 A
OBD, D P/SEAT, TI&TE, AM1,
D S/HTR, S/ROOF, D RR S/HTR,
D-IG1-1, D-IG1-2, D-IG1-3, D-IG1-4,
D-ACC, PWR OUTLET, PANEL
60 A
P P/SEAT 1, P P/SEAT 2, A/C,
RR SEAT, P S/HTR, P RR S/HTR,
P-IG1-1, P-IG1-2, P-IG1-3, P-IG1-4,
P-ACC, P-CIG, AIR SUS
10
LUG-J/B ALT
50 A
PTL, RL SEAT, B/ANC, FUEL OPN,
RR S/SHADE, PSB, RR-IG1-1,
RR-IG1-2, RR-IG1-3, RR-IG1-4,
RR-ACC, RR-CIG, AC100/115V
11
RR A/C
30 A
Rear air conditioning system
12
AIR SUS
40 A
Electronically modulated air suspension system
13
HTR
50 A
Air conditioning system
14
NOISE FILTER
40 A
15
DEFOG
40 A
Rear window defogger
16
PTC HTR 2
50 A
PTC heater
17
H-LP CLN
30 A
Headlight cleaner
18
E/G RM B
80 A
D/C CUT 1, FR CTRL BAT, EPS ECU,
ABS MAIN 2, ABS MTR2, ST,
H-LP RL, H-LP LL, H-LP LVL
19
EFI
80 A
VVT, ETCS, ABS MAIN 1, EDU1,
EDU2, A/F, ECU-IG, IGN, INJ, P-J/B
20
EPS
80 A
DC-DC converter
21
EFI NO.1
40 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
4
Maintenance and care

589
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
22
E/G RM B2
30 A
ABS MAIN 3, ECU-B2, D/C CUT 2
23
D-J/B B
40 A
D-DOOR 1, D RR DOOR, HAZ,
D-DOOR 2, STR LOCK, STOP,
SECURITY
24
LUG J/B B
40 A
STOP LP 1, STOP LP 2, TAIL, E-PKB,
ABS MAIN 4
25
P-J/B B
40 A
P DOOR 1, P RR DOOR, AM2,
RADIO NO.1, P-D/C CUT,
P DOOR 2, PMG, AMP
26
VGRS
40 A
VGRS
27
BAT VB
30 A
VSSR
■ Engine compartment (type B fuse box)
Fuse
590
Ampere
Circuit
1
DEICER
25 A
Windshield wiper de-icer
2
WIP
30 A
Windshield wiper
3
ABS MAIN 2
10 A
ABS, VSC, VDIM
4
IGCT 1
25 A
Smart access system with push-button
start
5
EPS ECU
10 A
EPS
6
FR CTRL BAT
30 A
Headlight high beams, horns
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
E/G RM-IG1-2
10 A
8
E/G RM-IG1-1
10 A
Starting system, EPS, electric cooling
fans, AFS
9
H-LP LL
15 A
Headlight low beam (left)
10
ABS MAIN 1
10 A
Brake system, pre-collision seat belt
11
H-LP RL
15 A
Headlight low beam (right)
12
ETCS
10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
13
NV IR
10 A
Cruise control system
10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system, brake system, SRS airbag system
14
IGN
15
ECU-IG
10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system, stop lights, pre-collision seat belt,
charging system
16
D/C CUT 1
30 A
ECU-B, D MPX-B 1, D MPX-B 2,
DOME
17
ECU-B
10 A
Headlight high beams, parking lights,
horns, windshield washer, pre-collision seat belt, headlight cleaner
15 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system, exhaust system
18
A/F
4
Maintenance and care
7
AFS, headlight high beams, parking
lights, side marker lights, horns, windshield washer, exhaust system, headlight cleaner
591
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
19
EDU2
25 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
20
FR CTRL ALT
20 A
Windshield washer, headlight cleaner,
parking lights, side maker lights
21
EDU1
25 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
22
RELIEF VLV
10 A
Fuel system
23
FR FOG
15 A
Front fog lights
24
A/C W/P
10 A
Air conditioning system, electric cooling fans
25
H-LP LVL
10 A
Discharge headlights, headlight high
beams, parking lights, side marker
lights, horns, windshield washer
26
P-J/B
10 A
P IG2, P RR-IG2
27
INJ
10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
28
D/C CUT 2
30 A
P MPX-B, RR MPX-B1, RR MPX-B2
29
ECU-B 2
5A
Brake system
30
ABS MAIN 3
10 A
Brake system, pre-collision seat belt
31
EFI MAIN 2
25 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system, exhaust system
32
EFI MAIN
25 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system, fuel system
592
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
33
EFI
10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system, fuel system
34
EFI-B
10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
35
ST
30 A
Starter system
36
ABS MTR1
50 A
Brake system
37
ABS MTR2
50 A
Brake system
38
VVT
40 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
4
Maintenance and care
593
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Driver’s side instrument panel
Fuse
594
Ampere
Circuit
1
D-IG1-3
10 A
Automatic transmission, power door
lock system, cruise control system,
brake system, rear window defogger,
moon roof, pre-collision seat belt,
head restraints, power outlet, turn signal lights, climate control seat system,
audio system
2
D-IG1-2
5A
Cruise control system
3
D-IG1-4
15 A
Starter system, climate control seat
system
4
D-IG1-1
5A
Main body ECU, pre-collision seat
belt, tilt and telescopic steering column, starter system
5
PWR OUTLET
15 A
Power outlet
6
D-ACC
5A
Multiplex communication system
7
S/ROOF
30 A
Moon roof
8
TI&TE
30 A
Tilt and telescopic steering column
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
9
AM1
5A
Power door lock system
10
OBD
10 A
On-board diagnosis system
11
D P/SEAT
30 A
Front seat adjustment
12
D S/HTR
20 A
Climate control seat system
13
D RR S/HTR
30 A
Climate control seat system
14
D MPX-B 1
10 A
Meters and gauges, front seat adjustment, rear seat adjustment, tilt and
telescopic steering column, power
door lock system, cruise control system
15
DOME
10 A
Interior lights, clock
16
D MPX-B 2
10 A
Audio system
17
PANEL
10 A
Fuel filler door opener, interior lights,
audio system
18
SECURITY
5A
Smart access system with push-button
start
19
STR LOCK
20 A
Steering lock system
20
D DOOR 2
10 A
Power door lock system
21
HAZ
10 A
Emergency flashers
22
D RR DOOR
25 A
Interior lights, power door lock system, power windows
D DOOR 1
25 A
24
STOP
5A
Stop lights
25
AMP
30 A
Audio system
595
Maintenance and care
23
Interior lights, outside rear view mirror, power door lock system, power
windows, outside rear view mirror
defogger
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Passenger’s side instrument panel
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
1
P-IG1-2
5A
Audio system
2
P-IG1-3
5A
VGRS
3
P-IG1-1
10 A
Audio system, navigation system,
power door lock system, air conditioning system, head restraints, precollision seat belt, intuitive parking
assist, tire pressure warning system
4
P-IG1-4
10 A
Climate control seat system
5
P-CIG
15 A
Cigarette lighter
6
P-ACC
5A
Audio system, navigation system,
clock, Lexus link system, cruise control system
7
A/C
10 A
Air conditioning system
8
P S/HTR
20 A
Climate control seat system
9
P P/SEAT 2
30 A
Front seat adjustment
10
RR SEAT
30 A
Rear seat adjustment
596
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
11
P P/SEAT 1
30 A
Front seat adjustment
12
P RR S/HTR
30 A
Climate control seat system
13
P IG2
5A
Tilt and telescopic steering column,
smart access system with push-button start, meters and gauges, electric
power control system, Lexus link system
14
P RR-IG2
5A
On-board diagnosis system, Lexus
link system
10 A
Power door lock system, front seat
adjustment, rear seat adjustment,
VGRS, smart access system with
push-button start, starter system, intuitive parking assist
15
P MPX-B
AIR SUS
20 A
Electronically modulated air suspension system
17
AM2
5A
Multiplex communication system
18
RADIO NO.1
20 A
Air conditioning system, navigation
system, Lexus link system
19
PMG
5A
Electric power control system
Maintenance and care
16
4
20
P-D/C CUT
5A
Headlight switch, windshield wiper
and washer, horn, tilt and telescopic
steering column, power windows,
power door lock system, door sunshade, rear sunshade, rear seat adjustment, steering wheel switches
21
P DOOR 2
10 A
Power door lock system
22
P RR DOOR
25 A
Interior lights, power door lock system, power windows
597
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
23
P DOOR 1
25 A
Interior lights, outside rear view mirror, power door lock system, power
windows, outside rear view mirror
defogger
24
AMP
30 A
Audio system
■ Trunk
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
1
RR-IG1-3
10 A
Climate control seat system
2
RR-IG1-4
10 A
Rear seat adjustment
3
RR-IG1-2
10 A
Power door lock system, cool box, air
conditioning system
4
RR-IG1-1
5A
Capacitor, brake system, pre-collision
seat belt, rear seat adjustment
5
RR-ACC
5A
Audio system, rear seat entertainment
system
6
RR-CIG
15 A
Cigarette lighter
7
AC100/115V
15 A
Power outlet
598
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
8
RL SEAT
30 A
Rear seat adjustment
9
B/ANC
10 A
Shoulder anchor
10
RR S/SHADE
10 A
Rear sunshade
11
PSB
30 A
Pre-collision seat belt
12
PTL
30 A
Power trunk opener and closer
13
FUEL OPN
15 A
Fuel filler door opener, power trunk
opener and closer
14
RR MPX-B 1
10 A
Audio system, rear seat entertainment
system, power trunk opener and
closer
15
RR MPX-B 2
5A
Power door lock system, rear seat
adjustment, interior lights, power
trunk opener and closer
IGCT 3
5A

17
BATT FAN
20 A
Electric cooling fans
18
B-FAN RLY
5A
Electric cooling fans
19
RR ECU-B
5A
Seat belt buckle lights, trunk light
20
ABS MAIN 4
10 A
Capacitor
21
STOP LP 1
10 A
Stop lights, back-up lights
22
STOP LP 2
10 A
Stop lights, high-mounted stoplights
23
TAIL
5A
Tail lights, license plate lights
24
E-PKB
30 A
Maintenance and care
16
4
Brake system
599
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ After a fuse is replaced
● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may
need replacement. (P. 603)
● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
■ If there is an overload in the circuit
The fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged.
CAUTION
■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other
object in place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.
● Do not modify fuses or the fuse box.
NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus
dealer.
600
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Headlight aim
■ Removing the engine compartment cover.
P. 550
■ Vertical movement adjusting bolts
Adjustment bolt A
Adjustment bolt B
■ Before checking the headlight aim
STEP 1 Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gas and the area around
the headlight is not deformed.
STEP 2 Park the vehicle on level ground.
STEP 3 Sit in the driver’s seat.
STEP 4 Bounce the vehicle several times.
■ Adjusting the headlight aim
Turn bolt A in either direction
STEP 1
using a Phillips-head screwdriver.
4
Maintenance and care
Remember the turning direction
and the number of turns in mind.
601
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 2
Turn bolt B the same number of
turns and in the same direction
as step 1 using a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
If the error is over the value
specified above, take the vehicle
to your Lexus dealer to adjust
the headlight aim
602
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of
replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement
seems difficult to perform, contact your Lexus dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus
dealer.
■ Preparing for light bulb replacement
Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (P. 677)
■ Remove the engine compartment cover
P. 550
■ Front bulb locations
Front turn signal light
4
Maintenance and care
Front fog light
Headlight high beam
603
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Rear bulb locations
Back-up light
Rear turn signal light
Replacing light bulbs
■ Headlight high beams
STEP 1 Before replacing the bulbs:
Left side
Remove the securing bolt and
move the washer fluid filler opening.
604
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Right side
Remove the securing bolts and
nut, and move the fuse block.
STEP 2
Turn the cover counterclockwise
and remove it.
4
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
STEP 4
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
605
Maintenance and care
STEP 3
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Front fog lights
STEP 1
To allow enough working clearance, turn the steering wheel to
the opposite side of the bulb to be
replaced.
Remove the fender liner bolt and
clips, and then remove the fender
liner.
STEP 2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
STEP 3
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
606
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 4
Install the bolt and clips.
■ Front turn signal lights
STEP 1 Before replacing the bulbs:
Left side
Remove the securing bolt and
move the washer fluid filler opening.
4
Remove the securing bolts and
nut, and move the fuse block.
607
Maintenance and care
Right side
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 2
Turn the cover counterclockwise
and remove it.
STEP 3
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
STEP 4
Remove the light bulb.
608
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Back-up lights
STEP 1
Open the trunk lid and remove the
cover.
STEP 2
Turn the bulb bases counterclockwise.
4
Remove the light bulb.
Maintenance and care
STEP 3
609
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Rear turn signal lights
STEP 1
Open the trunk lid and remove the
cover.
STEP 2
Turn the bulb bases counterclockwise.
STEP 3
Remove the light bulbs.
610
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Lights other than the above
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your
Lexus dealer.
● Headlight low beams
● Parking lights
● Side turn signal lights
● Side marker lights
● Stop/tail lights
● High mounted stoplight
● License plate lights
4
Maintenance and care
611
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a
malfunction.
● Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.
■ Discharge headlights
If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on, or may
go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is
restored.
■ LED stop/tail lights and high mounted stoplight
The stop/tail lights and high mounted stoplight consists of a number of LEDs. If any
of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light
replaced.
612
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turn-
ing off the headlights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by
the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so may
result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage
the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
● Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam discharge headlight bulbs,
connectors, power supply circuits, or related components.
Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death.
■ Discharge headlights
● Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing discharge headlights (including light
bulbs).
the headlights are turned on.
An extremely high voltage of 20000 V will be discharged and could result in
serious injury or death by electric shock.
■ To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
613
Maintenance and care
● Do not touch the high-intensity discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
614
When trouble arises
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers................ 616
If your vehicle needs to
be towed.................................. 617
If you think something
is wrong .................................. 623
Fuel pump shut off
system ..................................... 624
Event data recorder .............. 625
5
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If a warning light turns on
or a warning buzzer
sounds... .................................. 627
If a warning message is
displayed................................ 636
If you have a flat tire............... 639
If the engine will not start ..... 647
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from “P”.................... 649
If the parking brake
cannot be released............. 650
If you lose your keys .............. 652
If the electronic key does
not operate properly.......... 653
If the vehicle battery is
discharged ............................. 657
If your vehicle overheats ..... 660
If the vehicle becomes
stuck........................................ 663
615
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is involved in an
accident.
Press the switch to flash all the
turn signal lights. To turn them
off, press the switch once again.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the engine is
not running.
616
5-1. Essential information
If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your
Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a
flatbed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial
and local laws.
2WD models: If towing from the rear, the vehicle’s front wheels and axles
must be in good condition. (P. 621)
If the vehicle is damaged, use a towing dolly or flatbed truck.
Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Lexus dealer before towing.
● The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.
● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Emergency towing
Towing eyelet
617
5
When trouble arises
If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing
eyelet(s). This should only be attempted on hard, surfaced roads for short
distances at low speeds.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.
5-1. Essential information
■ Before emergency towing
● Release the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to “N”.
● Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY (engine off) or
IGNITION ON mode (engine running).
CAUTION
■ Caution while towing
● Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on
the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains.
● If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not
function, making steering and braking more difficult.
NOTICE
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission (2WD models)
Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.
This may cause serious damage to the transmission.
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission and the transfer (AWD
models)
Never tow this vehicle with any of the wheels in contact with the ground.
This may cause serious damage to the transmission and the transfer.
618
5-1. Essential information
Installing towing eyelets
STEP 1
Remove the eyelet cover using a
flat head screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a
rag between the screwdriver and
the vehicle body, as shown in the
illustration.
STEP 2
Insert the towing eyelet into the
hole and tighten partially by hand.
STEP 3
Tighten down the towing eyelet
securely using a wheel nut wrench.
5
When trouble arises
■ Location of the emergency towing eyelet
P. 639
619
5-1. Essential information
CAUTION
■ Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle
Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing. This may
lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.
Towing with a sling-type truck
NOTICE
■ To prevent body damage
Do not tow with a sling type truck, either from the front or rear.
620
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a wheel lift-type truck
From the front
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.
From the rear (2WD models)
Switch to ACCESSORY mode so
that the steering wheel is
unlocked.
5
From the rear (AWD models)
621
When trouble arises
Use a towing dolly under the front
wheel.
5-1. Essential information
NOTICE
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission (2WD models)
Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission and the transfer (AWD
models)
Never tow this vehicle with any of the wheels in contact with the ground.
■ To prevent damaging the vehicle
● Do not tow the vehicle with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels
straight.
● When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the
opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle
could be damaged while being towed.
Using a flat bed truck
If your Lexus is transported by a
flat bed truck, it should be tied
down at the locations shown in the
illustration.
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs
or the vehicle may be damaged.
622
5-1. Essential information
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs
adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■ Visible symptoms
● Fluid leaks under the vehicle.
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points
higher than normal.
■ Audible symptoms
● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the engine
■ Operational symptoms
● Engine missing, stumbling or running rough
● Appreciable loss of power
5
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking.
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches
the floor
623
When trouble arises
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road.
5-1. Essential information
Fuel pump shut off system
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag
inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to
the engine.
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.
STEP 1
Switch to ACCESSORY mode or OFF.
STEP 2
Restart the engine.
NOTICE
■ Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been damaged
and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
624
5-1. Essential information
Event data recorder
Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of
your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal
vehicle performance.
Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is an event data
recorder (EDR) that records data in a crash or a near car crash event.
In a crash or a near car crash event
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a near
car crash event, this device may record some or all of the following information:
● Engine speed
● Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
● Vehicle speed
● To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
● Position of the transmission shift lever
5
● Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not
● SRS airbag deployment data
● SRS airbag system diagnostic data
● Front passenger’s occupant classification
The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR
does not record sound data such as conversation between passengers.
625
When trouble arises
● Driver's seat position
5-1. Essential information
Disclosure of the data
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party
except when:
● An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the leasing company for a
leased vehicle) is obtained
● Officially requested by the police or other authorities
● Used as a defense for Lexus in a law suit
● Ordered by a court law
However, if necessary Lexus will:
● Use the data for research on Lexus vehicle safety performance
● Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed necessary
● Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information
to a non-Lexus organization for research purposes
626
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or
flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Brake system warning light (red indicator)
• Low brake fluid
(Canada) • Malfunction in the electronically controlled brake system
(U.S.A.)
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle
that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Lexus dealer.
When trouble arises
Warning light
5
Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
627
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the
system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The electronic engine control system;
(Canada) • The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic automatic transmission control system
(U.S.A.)
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
(Canada)
• The brake assist system
(U.S.A.)
Brake system warning light (yellow indicator)
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The electronically controlled brake system; or
• The electric parking brake
Electric power steering system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering)
system
Pre-collision system warning light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system
628
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
● Is the fuel empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon
as possible.
■ Electric power steering warning light
When the battery is low or when the voltage drops temporarily, the electric power
steering warning light may come on.
CAUTION
■ When the electric power steering warning light comes on
The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, firmly hold and
operate it using more force than usual.
5
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning light turns off.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Correction procedure
Open door warning light
(warning buzzer)*1
Indicates that a door or the
trunk is not fully closed.
Check that all doors and the
trunk are closed.
629
When trouble arises
Follow the correction procedures.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
In the fuel
gauge
Warning light/Details
Correction procedure
Low fuel level warning light
Remaining fuel
Refuel the vehicle.
(Approximately 3.4 gal. [13L,
2.8 Imp. gal.] or less)
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light (warning buzzer)*2
Warns the driver to fasten
his/her seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
Fasten the seat belt.
(warning buzzer)*2
Warns the front passenger to
fasten his/her seat belt.
Tire pressure warning light
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure.
Adjust the tire pressure.
When the light comes on after
blinking for 1 minute:
Have the system checked by
Malfunction in the tire presyour Lexus dealer.
sure warning system.
Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the
warning light comes on or
flashes to indicate that the
master warning system has
detected a malfunction.
630
P. 636
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
*1: Open door warning buzzer:
The open door warning buzzer sounds to alert one or more of the doors is not
fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
*2: Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt reminders:
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminders sound to alert the driver
and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds
intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of at least 12
mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a
different tone for 20 more seconds.
■ Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder
● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection
sensor may cause the warning light to flash, even if a passenger is not sitting in
the seat.
● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the
warning light may not operate properly.
■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire
pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire pressure warning light.
■ The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes
■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
The spare tire is also equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter.
The tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire inflation pressure of the spare
tire is low. If a tire goes flat, even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire,
the tire pressure warning light does not turn off. Replace the spare tire with the
repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning
light will turn off after a few minutes.
631
5
When trouble arises
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air
leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.
● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not regis-
tered in the tire pressure warning computer.
● If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or higher.
The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby.
● If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.
● If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or
wheel housings.
● If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used. (Even if you use Lexus wheels, the tire
pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)
● If tire chains are used.
● If the spare tire is in a location subject to poor radio wave signal reception.
● If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is put in the
trunk.
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently
If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently
when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, have
it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled.
(Customizable features P. 692)
632
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of
vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pres-
sure immediately.
● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjust-
ment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat,
change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus
dealer.
● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could
lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
5
When trouble arises
633
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label).
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) to continue to function properly.
634
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ Precaution when installing a different tire
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.
5
When trouble arises
635
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning message is displayed
The multi-information display shows warnings of system malfunctions,
incorrectly performed operations, or shows messages that indicate a need
for maintenance. When a message is shown, perform the correction procedure appropriate to the message.
Master warning light
The master warning light comes
on or flashes when a message is
being shown on the multi-information display.
Multi-information display
If any of the warning messages is shown again after its correction procedure has been performed, contact your Lexus dealer.
636
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Messages and warnings
The warning lights and warning buzzers operate as follows depending on
the content of the message. If a message indicates the need for inspection by a dealer, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
System
warning
light
Comes on

Flashes
Flashes
Comes on
or flashes



Warning
Sounds
Indicates an important situation, such
as when a system related to driving is
malfunctioning or that danger may
result if the correction procedure is
not performed
Sounds
Indicates an important situation, such
as when the system shown on the
multi-information display may be
malfunctioning
Sounds
Indicates a situation, such as when
damage to the vehicle or danger may
result
Does not
sound
Indicates a condition, such as malfunction of electrical components,
their condition, or indicates the need
for maintenance
Does not
sound
Indicates a situation, such as when an
operation has been performed incorrectly, or indicates how to perform an
operation correctly
*: A buzzer sounds the first time a message is shown on the multi-information
display.
637
5
When trouble arises
Comes on

Warning
buzzer*
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ System warning lights
The master warning light does not come on or flash in the following cases. Instead, a
separate system warning light will come on or flash along with the message shown
on the multi-information display.
● Malfunction of the AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System)
The “AFS OFF” indicator light flashes. (P. 179)
● Malfunction of the brake system
The brake system warning light (red indicator) comes on. (P. 627)
● Malfunction of the electronically controlled brake system or electric parking
brake
The brake system warning light (yellow indicator) comes on. (P. 628)
● Malfunction of the ABS
The ABS warning light comes on. (P. 628)
● Malfunction of the charging system
The charging system warning light comes on. (P. 627)
● High engine coolant temperature
The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone.
(P. 167)
■ When “Electrical equipment operation is limited” is shown
This message indicates that the battery is low. When the message is shown, operation of electrical equipment that uses a large amount of electric power, such as the
air conditioning system, may be limited temporarily. This does not indicate a malfunction. Operation of electrical equipment will be restored after the battery is
charged.
638
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.
■ Before jacking up the vehicle
● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to “P”.
● Stop the engine.
● Turn on the emergency flashers.
■ Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Jack handle
Parking brake release tool
Wrench
Penlight batteries
5
Jack
When trouble arises
Towing eyelet
Penlight
Spare tire
Tools
639
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Penlight
The vehicle is equipped with a penlight, located inside the trunk. The penlight is provided in case it is necessary to perform an unexpected service
operation at night, such as installation of the spare tire.
Turn the top portion to remove
it.
Insert batteries.
Install the top portion.
On/off
Taking out the jack and spare tire
STEP 1
Lift up the hook of the panel on the
trunk floor.
STEP 2
Secure the panel using the hook
provided.
640
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 3
Remove the tool tray.
STEP 4
Remove the jack after removing
the hook.
STEP 5
Loosen the center fastener that
secures the spare tire.
641
5
When trouble arises
If the center fastener cannot be
turned by hand, use the wrench
that is stored in the trunk. (To
secure the tire, tighten the center
fastener by hand. Do not use the
wrench or other tools.)
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
STEP 1
Chock the tires.
Flat tire
Lefthand side
Front
Righthand side
Lefthand side
Rear
Righthand side
STEP 2
STEP 3
642
Wheel chock
positions
Behind the
rear righthand side tire
Behind the
rear lefthand side tire
In front of the
front righthand side tire
In front of the
front lefthand side tire
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one
turn).
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack is in
contact with the jack point.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 4
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
STEP 5
Remove all the wheel nuts and the
tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
5
When trouble arises
643
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Installing the spare tire
Remove any dirt or foreign matter
from the wheel contact surface.
STEP 1
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is in
motion, and the tire may come off
the vehicle.
STEP 2
Washer
Wheel nut
Disc wheel
STEP 3
STEP 4
Install the spare tire and loosely
tighten each wheel nut by hand to
approximately the same amount.
Turn the lug nuts until the washers
come into contact with the wheel.
Lower the vehicle.
Firmly tighten each nut two or
three times in the order shown in
the illustration.
Tightening torque:
103.3 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)
644
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 5
Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.
■ After completing the tire change
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 566)
CAUTION
■ Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to the vehicle
suddenly falling off the jack.
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and
removing tire chains.
● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires
on this vehicle.
● Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.
● Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
5
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
● Vehicles with electronically modulated air suspension: Be sure to turn off the
height control and stop the engine.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or
near the vehicle may be injured.
645
When trouble arises
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Replacing a flat tire
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury:
● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to
bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts
to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident. Remove any oil or
grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
● Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 103.3 ft•lbf (140 N•m,
14.3 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and the wheel
may fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel
beyond repair.
■ When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
646
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the engine will not start
If the engine will not start, even though correct starting procedures are
being followed (P. 152), consider each of the following points.
■ The engine will not start, even when the starter motor operates
normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
● The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting
procedures. (P. 152)
● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(P. 101)
■ The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● The battery may be discharged. (P. 657)
5
● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
● The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. However,
an interim measure is available to start the engine. (P. 648)
647
When trouble arises
■ The starter motor does not turn over.
The following may be the cause of the problem:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The battery may be discharged. (P. 657)
● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.
Emergency start function
When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an
interim measure to start the engine if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
is functioning normally:
Set the parking brake.
Put the shift lever in “P”.
STEP 3 Set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode.
STEP 4 Press and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may
be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
STEP 1
STEP 2
648
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from “P”
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there
may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental
operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that
the shift lever can be shifted:
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
Set the parking brake.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY
mode.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent.
Press the shift lock override button.
649
When trouble arises
The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.
5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the parking brake cannot be released
In the event that the battery is discharged or switch operation does not
release the parking brake, the parking brake can be released manually
using the procedure below. This procedure should be performed only if
necessary, such as in an emergency.
If the switch cannot be operated even when the battery is normal, the parking brake system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer immediately.
■ Before releasing the parking brake manually
● Shift the shift lever to “P”.
● Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
● Check that the parking brake indicator is off.
● Chock the tires.
Releasing the parking brake manually
STEP 1
Take out the parking brake release
tool and the screwdriver from the
trunk. (P. 639)
Install the parking brake release
tool into the screwdriver handle.
STEP 2
650
Take out the spare tire. (P. 639)
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 3
STEP 4
Remove the plug.
Insert the tool and press it down
firmly while turning it counterclockwise until it stops.
■ Manual operation of the parking brake
The parking brake cannot be set manually.
5
CAUTION
● Shift the shift lever to “P”, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and
chock the tires.
Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move, resulting in an accident.
● Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and check that the parking brake
indicator is off.
Failure to do so may cause the system to operate and turn the parking brake
release tool that is inserted, resulting in an injury.
651
When trouble arises
■ When releasing the parking brake manually
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you lose your keys
New genuine Lexus keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using one of
the other keys and the key number stamped on your key number plate.
652
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate properly
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted
(P. 37) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is
depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and wireless
remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be
opened or the engine can be started by following the procedure below.
Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk and key linked functions
Doors
Remove the cover on the driver’s
door handle using the mechanical
key (P. 29) in order to perform
the following operations.
Locks all doors
Closes the windows (turn and
hold)
The moon roof will also close.
(if equipped)
5
Unlocks the door
Opens the windows (turn and
hold)
The moon roof will also open.
(if equipped)
Return the cover to the original
position after use.
653
When trouble arises
Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver's door. Turning the key
once again unlocks the other
doors.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Trunk
Turn the mechanical key clockwise to open.
654
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes and starting the engine
STEP 1
STEP 2
Shift the shift lever to “P” and apply the brakes.
Touch the Lexus emblem side of
the electronic key to the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
If any of the doors is opened or
closed after the key was touched to
the switch to start the vehicle, an
alarm will sound to indicate that the
start function cannot detect the
key.
To change “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes: Within 5 seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and press
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Modes can be changed
each time the switch is pressed. (P. 153)
To start the engine: Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
within 10 seconds [after the buzzer sounds], keeping the brake
pedal depressed.
In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact your Lexus
dealer.
5
STEP 3
When trouble arises
655
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to “P” and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as you normally do when stopping the engine.
■ Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted.
(P. 582)
656
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s
battery is discharged.
You can call your Lexus dealer or qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle
with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Lexus following the steps
below.
STEP 1
Remove the engine compartment covers and battery cover.
(P. 550)
STEP 2
Connect the jumper cables.
657
5
When trouble arises
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the
illustration.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
STEP 4 Open and close any of the doors with the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF.
STEP 5 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode,
then start the engine.
STEP 6 Once the engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the
exact reverse order in which they were connected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible.
STEP 3
■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■ Avoiding a discharged battery
● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is turned off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a
low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.
658
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable
gas that may be emitted from the battery:
● Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not
unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” termi-
nals.
● Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near the
battery.
■ Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts
contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery:
● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to
allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the battery.
● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immedi-
● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other
battery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the battery.
NOTICE
■ When handling jumper cables
Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or belt
when connecting or disconnecting the cables.
659
5
When trouble arises
ately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be
received.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
If your engine overheats:
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
660
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning
system.
Check to see if steam is coming out from the engine area.
If you see steam:
Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides and then restart the engine.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.
Remove the engine compartment cover. (P. 550)
Check if the cooling fan is operating.
If the fans are operating:
Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the
instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the engine.
If the fans are not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and call your local Lexus
dealer.
After the engine has cooled
down, check the engine coolant
level and inspect the cooling
system for leaks.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 6
Add engine coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if engine coolant is
unavailable. (P. 671)
Have the vehicle inspected at your nearest Lexus dealer as soon as
possible.
5
■ Overheating
● The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is
experienced.
● Steam is coming from the engine area.
661
When trouble arises
The following symptoms may occur when your vehicle is overheating:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the
steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, causing serious
injury such as burns.
● Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the engine is
running.
● Do not loosen the coolant reservoir cap while the engine and radiator are hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released
under pressure.
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly
can cause damage to the engine.
662
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes
stuck in mud, dirt, or snow:
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and put the shift lever in
“P”.
Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.
Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide
traction under the tires.
Restart the engine.
Shift the shift lever to the “D” or “R” position and carefully apply
the accelerator to free the vehicle.
Turn off TRAC/VSC if these functions are hampering your attempts
to free the vehicle. ( P. 215)
CAUTION
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons. The vehicle may
also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine.
● If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may require
towing to be freed.
663
When trouble arises
■ When shifting the shift lever
5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
664
Vehicle specifications
6
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) .............. 666
Fuel information...................... 678
Tire information....................... 681
6-2. Customization
Customizable features ........ 692
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ..................... 696
665
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weights
Overall length
LS460
198.0 in. (5030 mm)
LS460L
202.8 in. (5150 mm)
Overall width
Overall height *1
Wheelbase
Front
Tread
Rear
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)
73.8 in. (1875 mm)
2WD
models
58.1 in. (1475 mm)*2
57.7 in. (1465 mm)*3
AWD
models
58.1 in. (1475 mm)
LS460
116.9 in. (2970 mm)
LS460L
121.7 in. (3090 mm)
2WD
models
63.6 in. (1615 mm)*4
63.4 in. (1610 mm)*5
AWD
models
63.6 in. (1615 mm)
2WD
models
63.8 in. (1620 mm)*4
63.6 in. (1615 mm)*5
AWD
models
63.6 in. (1615 mm)
825 lb. (375 kg)*6
675 lb. (305 kg)*7
*1: Unladen vehicles
*2: Vehicles without an electronically modulated air suspension
*3: Vehicles with an electronically modulated air suspension
*4: Vehicles with 18-inch tires
*5: Vehicles with 19-inch tires
*6: 5-seat models
*7: 4-seat models
666
6-1. Specifications
Vehicle identification
■ Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used
in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel and in the engine
compartment.
This number is also on the Certification Label.
6
Vehicle specifications
667
6-1. Specifications
■ Engine number
2WD models
The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown.
AWD models
The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown.
668
6-1. Specifications
Engine
Model
1UR-FSE
Type
8-cylinder V type,
4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke
3.70 3.27 in.
(94.0  83.0 mm)
Displacement
281.2 cu.in.
(4608 cm3)
Drive belt tension
Automatic adjustment
Fuel
Fuel type
Unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating
91 (Research octane number 96) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
22.1 gal. (84 L, 18.4 Imp. gal.)
6
Vehicle specifications
669
6-1. Specifications
Lubrication system
Oil capacity
(drain and refill)
with filter
2WD models
AWD models
without filter
9.1 qt. (8.6 L, 7.6 Imp. qt.)
9.5 qt. (9.0 L, 7.9 Imp. qt.)
8.9 qt. (8.4 L, 7.4 Imp. qt.)
■ Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus
approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20
SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20 engine oil
may be used. However, SAE 0W20 is the best choice for good fuel
economy, and good starting in
cold weather.
Outside temperature
The 0W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of
the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W
allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating
temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the
vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
670
6-1. Specifications
How to read oil container label:
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you
select the oil you should use.
Cooling system
Capacity
Coolant type
2WD
models
11.6 qt. (11.0 L, 9.7 Imp. qt.)
AWD
models
11.7 qt. (11.1 L, 9.8 Imp. qt.)
Use either of the following.
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
6
Vehicle specifications
671
6-1. Specifications
Ignition system
Spark plug
Make
Gap
DENSO FK20HBR11
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust spark plug gap.
Electrical system
Battery
Open voltage* at
68F (20C):
12.6 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 12.0 V Discharged
(*: Voltage checked 20 minutes after the engine and
all the lights are turned off)
Charging rates
5A max.
Transfer (AWD models)
Oil capacity
0.74 qt. (0.70 L, 0.62 Imp. qt.)
Oil type and viscosity*
Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LX
75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent
*: “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” is filled in your Lexus vehicle at factory
fill. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your
Lexus dealer for further details.
672
6-1. Specifications
Front differential (AWD models)
Oil capacity
0.79 qt. (0.75 L, 0.66 Imp. qt.)
Oil type and viscosity*
Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT
75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent
*: “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” is filled in your Lexus vehicle at factory
fill. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your
Lexus dealer for further details.
Rear differential
2WD models
Oil capacity
1.42 qt. (1.35 L, 1.19 Imp. qt.)
Oil type and viscosity*
Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT
75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent
AWD models
Oil capacity
1.42 qt. (1.35 L, 1.19 Imp. qt.)
Oil type and viscosity*
Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LX
75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent
*: “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” is filled in your Lexus vehicle at factory
fill. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your
Lexus dealer for further details.
6
Vehicle specifications
673
6-1. Specifications
Automatic Transmission
Fluid capacity *
2WD models
10.9 qt. (10.3 L, 9.1 Imp. qt.)
AWD models
11.3 qt. (10.7 L, 9.4 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type
Toyota Genuine ATF WS
*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is necessary, contact
your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
■ Automatic transmission fluid type
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may
cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by
vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.
Brakes
Pedal clearance *
3.7 in. (95.0 mm) Min.
Pedal free play
0.04  0.08 in. (1.0  2.0 mm)
Brake pad wear limit
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lining wear limit
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
*: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 50 lbf (200 N, 20
kgf).
Steering
Free play
674
Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
6-1. Specifications
Tires and wheels
18-inch tires (type A)
Tire size
235/50R18 97W
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire Driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) (in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
inflation pressure)
Add 7 psi (50 kPa, 0.5 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front
tires, 11 psi (70 kPa, 0.7 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the rear
tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation
pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
18  7 1/2J
Wheel nut torque
103.3 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)
18-inch tires (type B)
Tire size
P235/50R18 97V
Wheel size
18  7 1/2J
Wheel nut torque
103.3 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)
675
6
Vehicle specifications
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire Driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) (in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
inflation pressure)
Add 5 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front
tires, 11 psi (70 kPa, 0.7 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the rear
tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation
pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
6-1. Specifications
19-inch tires (type A)
Tire size
245/45R19 98Y
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire Driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) (in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
inflation pressure)
Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front
tires, 11 psi (70 kPa, 0.7 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the rear
tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation
pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
19  8J
Wheel nut torque
103.3 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)
19-inch tires (type B)
Tire size
P245/45R19 98V
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Tire inflation pressure
Spare: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
(Recommended cold tire Driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) (in
inflation pressure)
countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
Add 7 psi (50 kPa, 0.5 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front
tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold
tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
19  8J
Wheel nut torque
103.3 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)
676
6-1. Specifications
Light bulbs
Light Bulbs
Bulb No.
W
Type
9005

60
35
A
B
Front side marker lights
194
3.8
C
Front turn signal lights

21
D
Parking lights

5
C
9006
51
E
Trunk lid light
194
3.8
C
Trunk light

3.8
C
Rear turn signal lights
921
16
C
Back-up lights
921
16
C
Outer foot lights

5
C
Vanity lights
Front
Rear


8
3
C
F
Interior lights
Front
Rear


8
8
C
F
Door courtesy lights

5
C
Headlights
High beam (halogen bulbs)
Low beam (discharge bulbs)
Exterior Front fog lights
Interior
Vehicle specifications
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
6
HB3 halogen bulbs
D4S discharge bulbs
Wedge base bulbs (clear)
Wedge base bulbs (amber)
HB4 halogen bulbs
Double end bulbs
677
6-1. Specifications
Fuel information
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
Premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (Research Octane
Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance. If 91
octane cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number 91). Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 91 may result in engine knocking and
significantly reduced performance. Persistent knocking can lead to engine
damage and should be corrected by refueling with higher octane unleaded
gasoline.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of
ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that only
accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Lexus dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating
or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
■ Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you
are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this
does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.
678
6-1. Specifications
■ Gasoline quality standards
● Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a
specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is
expected to be applied worldwide.
● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission
levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted.
● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and
customer satisfaction through better performance.
■ Lexus recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to
avoid build-up of engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep
clean intake systems.
■ Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many
areas.
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■ Lexus does not recommend blended gasoline
● Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate con-
tent is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE.
● If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower
than 87.
6
● Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.
679
Vehicle specifications
■ Lexus does not recommend gasoline containing MMT
6-1. Specifications
NOTICE
■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be damaged.
● Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.
● Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.
● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than that started
here will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
■ Fuel-related poor driveability
If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
■ When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.
680
6-1. Specifications
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
Tire size
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Location of treadwear indicators
Tire ply composition and materials
(P. 683)
(P. 682)
(P. 565)
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands
which form the plies in a tire.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has RADIAL on the sidewall. A tire not marked RADIAL is a
bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
6
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure
Vehicle specifications
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A
tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.
(P. 569)
(P. 675)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform tire quality grading” that follows.
681
6-1. Specifications
Summer tire or all season tire
(P. 569)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a
summer tire.
Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire manufacturer's identification mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer's optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies that
the tire conforms to applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
682
6-1. Specifications
Tire size
■ Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
■ Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
6
Vehicle specifications
683
6-1. Specifications
Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S.A. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read
this information.
■ DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
684
6-1. Specifications
■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
■ Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and
they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.
■ Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing
the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
685
Vehicle specifications
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
6
6-1. Specifications
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term
Meaning
Cold tire inflation pressure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for
three hours or more, or has not been driven more
than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire
may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Recommended inflation
pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those standard
items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and
additional weight optional engine
Maximum loaded vehicle
weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows
686
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in
the third column of Table 1* below
Production options
weight
The combined weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the
standard items which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or accessory weight,
including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by
style or code
Rim width
Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68
kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
Vehicle maximum load on
distributing to each axle its share of the maximum
the tire
loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
Weather side
The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
687
Vehicle specifications
Vehicle normal load on
the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and
dividing by two
6
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between components in
the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber
which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
Cord
The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds
Cracking
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of
the tire extending to cord material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim
system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges
pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit
on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses
the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
Groove
The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless
tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire
Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the
carcass
688
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Intended outboard sidewall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must always
face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible
inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire
may be inflated
Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension
requirements
Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to
labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or
less.
Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
6
Vehicle specifications
689
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound between adjacent
plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted
on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
labeling, decoration, or protective bands
Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the tread and bead
Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber compound from the cord
material in the sidewall
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater
than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard
Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test
as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test
Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a
Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces,
and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol (
on at least one sidewall
Test rim
690
)
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be
any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the
road
Tread rib
A tread section running circumferentially around a
tire
Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of
wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly
securely during testing
*:Table 1  Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4
2
2 in front
5 through 10
3
2 in front, 1 in second seat
5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat
7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat
11 through 15
16 through 20
691
6
Vehicle specifications
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by an authorized Lexus
dealership.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
Item
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Smart access
system with
push-button
start
(P. 32)
Smart access system
with push-button start
On
Off
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers)
On
Off
Wireless remote control
On
Off
Unlocking operation
Driver's door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors unlocked
in one step
On
Off
Wireless
remote control
(P. 45)
Automatic door lock
function to be activated
if door is not opened
after being unlocked
Time elapsed before
automatic lock function
is activated if door is
not opened after being
unlocked
692
30 seconds
60 seconds
120 seconds
6-2. Customization
Item
Wireless
remote control
(P. 45)
Door lock
(P. 48,
653)
Power windows
(P. 92)
Default setting
Customized
setting
Operational signal
(Emergency flashers)
On
Off
Door lock buzzer
On
Off
Trunk unlocking operation
Push and hold
Push twice
One short push
Panic function
On
Off
Speed-detecting automatic door lock function
Off
On
Opening driver's door
unlocks all doors.
Off
On
Shifting gears to “P”
unlocks all doors.
On
Off
Shifting gears to position other than “P”
locks all doors.
On
Off
Unlocking using a key
Driver's door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors unlocked
in one step
Power trunk opener
and closer function
On
Off
Mechanical key linked
operation
On
Off
Mechanical key linked
operation
Open and close
6
Vehicle specifications
Trunk
(P. 53)
Function
Open only
Close only
693
6-2. Customization
Item
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Power windows
(P. 92)
Wireless remote control linked operation
On
Off
Linked entry operation
On
Off
Mechanical key linked
operation
On
Off
Mechanical key linked
operation
Open and close
Moon roof
(P. 95)
Automatic
light control
system
(P. 178)
Lights
(P. 178)
Linked operation of
components when
door key is used
Close only
Slide only
Tilt only
Wireless remote control linked operation
On
Off
Linked operation of
components when
wireless remote control used
Slide only
Tilt only
Linked entry function
On
Off
Light sensor sensitivity
Level 3
Level 1 to 5
Time elapsed before
headlights automatically turn off after
doors are closed
30 seconds
Daytime running light
system (U.S.A. only)
On
Off
Level 3
Level 1 to 5
Level 1
Level 2
Buzzer volume
Intuitive
parking assist Distance at which the
front and back sensors
(P. 199)
detect an obstacle
694
Open only
0 second
60 seconds
90 seconds
6-2. Customization
Item
Function
Illumination
(P. 453)
Seat belt
reminder
(P. 629)
Default setting
Customized
setting
7.5 seconds
Time elapsed before
lights turn off
15 seconds
Operation when the
doors are unlocked
On
Off
Operation after the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned
OFF
On
Off
Footwell lighting
On
Off
Shift lever lighting
On
Off
Outer foot lights
On
Off
Vehicle speed linked
seat belt reminder
buzzer
On
Off
30 seconds
Multi-information display (P. 174)
Country
Available languages
English and Spanish
Canada
English, French, German, Spanish and Italian
6
Vehicle specifications
U.S.A.
695
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation:
Item
When to initialize
Reference
Engine oil maintenance
data
After changing engine oil
P. 556
Tire pressure warning
system
When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed
P. 565
696
For owners
7
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners..................... 698
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) ............................. 699
697
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Tollfree: 1-800-25-LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov ; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
698
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted
from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
● Déroulez la sangle diagonale de
telle sorte qu'elle passe bien sur
l'épaule, sans pour autant être
en contact avec votre cou ou
glisser de votre épaule.
● Placez la sangle abdominale le
plus bas possible sur les
hanches.
● Réglez la position du dossier de
siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le
plus droit possible et calez-vous
bien dans le siège.
● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de
sécurité.
Guide de confort de ceinture de sécurité (sièges arrière extérieurs)
699
7
For owners
Si la sangle diagonale est proche
du cou de la personne, faites
coulisser le guide de confort de
ceinture de sécurité vers l'avant.
Entretien et soin
■ Ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède.
Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas
effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.
ATTENTION
■ Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne sont pas
entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. N'utilisez pas
une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture
de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune garantie de protection de l'occupant en
cas d'accident.
700
Index
Abbreviation list .................... 702
Alphabetical index................. 704
What to do if... ........................ 714
For details of equipment related to the navigation system,
such as the audio system and clock, refer to the
“Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
701
Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS
MEANING
2WD
2 Wheel Drive
A/C
Air Conditioning
ABS
Anti-Lock Brake System
AFS
Adaptive Front-lighting System
AI-SHIFT
Artificial Intelligence Shift control
ALR
Automatic Locking Retractor
AWD
All Wheel Drive
CAL
Calibration
CRS
Child Restraint System
DISP
Display
ECT
Electronic Controlled Transmission
ECU
Electronic Control Unit
EDR
Event data recorder
ELR
Emergency Locking Retractor
EPS
Electric Power Steering
GAWR
Gross Axle Weight Ratings
GPS
Global Positioning System
I/M
Emission inspection and maintenance
INFO
Information
LATCH
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
LED
Light Emitting Diode
MMT
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
M+S
Mud and Snow
MTBE
Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
OBD
On Board Diagnostics
702
Abbreviation list
ABBREVIATIONS
MEANING
PCS
Pre-Collision System
PWR
Power
SRS
Supplemental Restraint System
TIN
Tire Identification Number
TPMS
Tire Pressure Warning System
TRAC
Traction Control
VDIM
Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management
VGRS
Variable Gear Ratio Steering
VIB
Vibration
VIN
Vehicle Identification Number
VSC
Vehicle Stability Control
703
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A A/C
Air conditioning filter .......................579
Automatic air conditioning
system...............244, 253, 262, 272
Front air conditioning
system.......................... 244, 253, 262
Rear air conditioning system ........272
ABS.............................................................. 213
ACCESSORY mode .......................... 152
AFS .............................................................. 179
Adaptive front-lighting system......... 179
Air conditioning filter ..........................579
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter .......................579
Front air conditioning
system.......................... 244, 253, 262
Rear air conditioning system ........272
Airbags
Airbag operating conditions............112
Airbag precautions for your
child...........................................................117
Airbag warning light ........................628
Curtain shield airbag operating
conditions...............................................113
Curtain shield airbag
precautions ...........................................117
Front passenger occupant
classification system........................ 122
General airbag precautions ............117
Locations of airbags.......................... 108
Modification and disposal of
airbags.....................................................121
Proper driving posture ............106, 117
Side airbag operating
conditions...............................................113
Side airbag precautions .....................117
SRS airbags ........................................... 108
704
Alarm.......................................................... 103
Antenna.................................................... 287
Anti-lock brake system........................213
Armrest ....................................................488
Ashtrays.....................................................477
Audio input.................................. 302, 356
Audio system
Antenna...................................................287
Audio input...............................302, 356
Audio visual input..............................405
AUX adapter ..........................302, 356
A/V input adapter............................405
CD player/changer...............288, 313
DVD player...................328, 373, 374
MP3/WMA disc..................... 294, 321
Optimal use .............................300, 352
Portable music player.........302, 356
Radio ...........................................284, 308
Rear seat audio system ...................357
Rear seat entertainment
system.................................................. 363
Steering wheel audio switch........303
Audio visual input.................................405
Automatic air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter....................... 579
Front air conditioning
system...........................244, 253, 262
Rear air conditioning system........272
Automatic headlight leveling
system ..................................................... 180
Automatic light control system.........178
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission ...................156
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from “P” ............................... 649
“S” mode.................................................. 157
AUX adapter ............................. 302, 356
Alphabetical index
A/V input adapter ............................... 405
B Back-up lights
Wattage ..................................................677
Battery
Checking.................................................561
If the vehicle has discharged
battery.................................................. 657
Preparing and checking
before winter.................................... 228
Bluetooth® ............................................. 409
Brake
Fluid..........................................................559
Brake hold ..............................................164
Parking brake..........................................161
Brake assist...............................................213
Brake hold.................................................164
C Care
Exterior ...................................................530
Interior.....................................................533
Seat belts ............................................... 534
Cargo capacity ......................................223
Cargo hooks .......................................... 503
CD changer .................................288, 313
CD player......................................288, 313
Chains....................................................... 228
Child restraint system
Booster seats, definition................... 127
Booster seats, installation................135
Convertible seats, definition .......... 127
Convertible seats, installation .......135
Front passenger occupant
classification system ....................... 122
Infant seats, definition ........................ 127
Infant seats, installation......................135
Installing CRS with lower
anchors................................................. 133
Installing CRS with seatbelts......... 135
Installing CRS with top straps.......138
Child safety
Airbag precautions.............................. 117
Battery precautions .............562, 659
Child restraint system........................127
Child-protectors ...................................49
How your child should wear
the seatbelt............................................83
Installing child restraints....................132
Moon roof precautions...................... 97
Power window lock switch..............92
Power window precautions ............94
Removed electronic key battery
precautions....................................... 583
Seat belt comfort guide ...................... 81
Seat belt extender precautions..... 85
Seat belt precautions ..........................84
Seat heater precautions..................487
Trunk precautions.................................56
Child-protectors......................................49
Cigarette lighter....................................478
Cleaning
Exterior................................................... 530
Interior .................................................... 533
Seat belts................................................534
Climate control seat............................484
Climate control seat filter...................581
Clock ......................................................... 474
Coat hooks...............................................501
Coin holder .............................................460
Compass ................................................... 512
Condenser ..............................................559
Console box ...........................................464
Cool box...................................................466
705
Alphabetical index
Cooling system
Engine overheating ......................... 660
Cornering assist sensors .................... 199
Cruise control
Cruise control ...................................... 186
Dynamic radar cruise control ...... 189
Cup holders ............................................462
Curtain shield airbags..........................108
Customizable features .......................692
D Daytime running light system ........... 179
Defogger
Rear window........................................ 279
Side mirrors.......................................... 279
Dimensions..............................................666
Dinghy towing........................................233
Display
Multi-information display.................174
Touch screen.......................................236
Trip information....................................175
Warning message.............................636
Do-it-yourself maintenance .............542
Door courtesy lights
Door courtesy lights.........................453
Wattage.................................................. 677
Door pockets........................................... 461
Doors
Door glasses........................................... 92
Door lock................................ 32, 45, 48
Side mirrors.............................................90
Driver's seat belt reminder light .....629
Driving
Correct posture .................................. 106
Procedures.............................................144
Driving position memory......................70
DVD player ......................328, 373, 374
706
E Electric power steering........................213
Electronically modulated air
suspension............................................208
Electronic key
If the electronic key does not
operate properly............................ 653
Emergency flashers
Switch........................................................616
Emergency, in case of
If the electronic key does not
operate properly............................ 653
If the engine will not start................647
If the parking brake cannot be
released..............................................650
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from “P” ............................... 649
If the vehicle has discharged
battery ................................................. 657
If the warning buzzer sounds.......627
If the warning light turns on...........627
If the warning message is
displayed............................................ 636
If you have a flat tire ........................ 639
If you lose your keys ........................ 652
If you think something is
wrong ...................................................623
If your vehicle becomes stuck .... 663
If your vehicle needs to be
towed..................................................... 617
If your vehicle overheats................660
Alphabetical index
Engine
Accessory mode .................................152
Compartment .....................................548
Engine switch ........................................152
Hood .......................................................545
How to start the engine....................152
Identification number....................... 667
If the engine will not start............... 647
Ignition switch........................................152
Overheating.........................................660
Engine compartment cover............. 550
Engine coolant
Capacity................................................... 671
Checking............................................... 557
Preparing and checking
before winter.................................... 228
Engine coolant temperature
gauge....................................................... 167
Engine immobilizer system................. 101
Engine oil
Capacity.................................................670
Checking...............................................553
Preparing and checking
before winter.................................... 228
Engine oil maintenance data........... 556
EPS...............................................................213
Event data recorder............................ 625
F
First-aid kit storage belt .................... 503
Floor mat ..................................................502
Fluid
Brake....................................................... 559
Washer .................................................. 564
Fog lights
Switch..........................................................181
Wattage..................................................677
Footwell lighting....................................453
Front fog lights
Switch..........................................................181
Wattage..................................................677
Front passenger occupant
classification system ...........................122
Front passenger's seat belt
reminder light......................................629
Front passenger's seat position
memory .................................................... 74
Front seats
Adjustment...............................................60
Driving position memory..................70
Seat position memory ............... 70, 74
Front turn signal lights
Wattage..................................................677
Fuel
Capacity ................................................ 669
Fuel gauge...............................................167
Fuel pump shut off system.............624
Information ........................................... 678
Refueling....................................................98
Fuel door .....................................................98
Fuel filler door ...........................................98
Fuel pump shut off system.................624
Fuses ..........................................................584
707
Alphabetical index
G Garage door opener ......................... 506
Gauges .......................................................167
Glove box ................................................459
H Hands-free system
(for cellular phone) ...........................409
Hazard lights
Switch ........................................................616
Head restraints
Adjustment ............................................. 78
Headlight aim ..........................................601
Headlight cleaner..................................185
Headlights
Discharge headlight
precautions .........................................613
Replacing light bulbs........................603
Switch ........................................................178
Wattage.................................................. 677
Heaters
Seat heaters..........................................484
Side mirrors.......................................... 279
Steering wheel ....................................482
Height control
Electronically modulated air
suspension.........................................208
Hill-start assist control ......................... 213
Hood ..........................................................545
Hooks
Cargo......................................................503
Coat .......................................................... 501
Shopping bag......................................503
Horn ............................................................ 166
708
I
I/M test .......................................................541
Identification
Engine..................................................... 667
Vehicle.................................................... 667
Ignition switch ..........................................152
Illuminated entry system....................453
Indicator lights .........................................170
Initialization
Items to initialize.................................696
Inside rear view mirror..........................89
Interior lights
Interior lights ........................................ 453
Switch...................................................... 454
Wattage ..................................................677
J
Jack
Positioning a floor jack ................... 546
Vehicle-equipped jack................... 639
Jack handle .............................................639
K Keyless entry..................................................45
Keys
Electronic key .........................................28
Engine switch ........................................ 152
If the electronic key does not
operate properly............................ 653
If you lose your keys ........................ 652
Key number..............................................28
Keyless entry............................................45
Keys..............................................................28
Mechanical key ......................................29
Wireless remote control key...........45
Alphabetical index
L
Lexus link system....................................516
Light bulbs
Replacing...............................................603
Wattage ..................................................677
Lights
Door courtesy lights ........................ 453
Emergency flasher switch...............616
Fog light switch...................................... 181
Hazard light switch.............................616
Headlight switch ..................................178
Interior light switch............................ 454
Outer foot lights................................. 453
Overhead courtesy light ............... 453
Personal light switch........................ 454
Replacing light bulbs .......................603
Shift lever lighting .............................. 453
Turn signal lever...................................160
Vanity lights...........................................473
Wattage ..................................................677
Load capacity .........................................226
M Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance......... 542
General maintenance.....................538
Maintenance data .............................666
Maintenance requirements..........536
Meter
Instrument panel light control .......168
Meters....................................................... 167
Micro dust and
pollen filter.....................248, 257, 268
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror.......................89
Side mirror heaters ...........................279
Side mirrors .............................................90
Vanity mirrors......................................473
Moon roof...................................................95
MP3 disc .............................294, 321, 377
Multi-information display ....................174
N
Noise from under vehicle..................... 24
O Odometer..................................................167
Oil
Engine oil............................................... 553
Opener
Fuel filler door.........................................98
Hood....................................................... 545
Trunk ...........................................................53
Outer foot lights
Outer foot lights .................................453
Wattage..................................................677
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding..........................90
Mirror position memory....................70
Outside temperature display ........... 175
Overhead console ...............................470
Overhead courtesy lights
Overhead courtesy lights..............453
Wattage..................................................677
Overheating, Engine...........................660
709
Alphabetical index
P
R
710
Parking assist sensors .......................... 199
Parking brake............................................161
Parking lights
Replacing light bulbs........................603
Switch ........................................................178
Wattage.................................................. 677
PCS ............................................................. 219
Penlight .....................................................640
Personal lights
Switch ......................................................454
Power outlet........................................... 480
Power windows ........................................92
Pre-collision system.............................. 219
Radar cruise control.............................189
Radiator ....................................................559
Radio..............................................284, 308
RDS ............................................................286
Rear seat
Seat adjustment............................ 63, 66
Seat position memory ........................ 76
Rear seat entertainment system.....363
Rear seat relaxation system .............489
Rear sunshade .......................................493
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs........................603
Wattage.................................................. 677
Rear view mirror
Compass................................................. 512
Rear view monitor system ................. 210
Rear window defogger ...................... 279
Replacing
Electronic key battery..................... 582
Fuses........................................................584
Light bulbs ............................................603
Tires.......................................................... 639
Reporting safety defects for
U.S.A. owners.....................................698
S
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt ......................... 81
Automatic locking retractor ............82
Child restraint system
installation............................................ 132
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belts .................................... 534
Emergency locking retractor .........82
How to wear your seat belt ............ 80
How your child should wear
the seat belt.......................................... 83
Pregnant women,
proper seat belt use .........................82
Reminder light..................................... 629
Seat belt extenders.............................. 83
Seat belt pretensioners ....................... 81
Seat heaters............................................484
Seat position memory............ 70, 74, 76
Seating capacity.................................... 226
Alphabetical index
Seats
Adjustment ...........................60, 63, 66
Adjustment
precautions ........................ 62, 65, 69
Child seats/child restraint
system installation............................ 132
Cleaning ................................................533
Climate control ..................................484
Climate control seat ........................484
Driver’s seat position memory ...... 70
Front passenger's seat
position memory................................74
Head restraint ........................................ 78
Properly sitting in the seat...............106
Rear seat position memory..............76
Rear seat relaxation system .........489
Seat heaters..........................................484
Seat position memory....... 70, 74, 76
Service reminder indicators .............170
Shift lever
Automatic transmission....................156
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from “P” ............................... 649
Shift lever lighting................................. 453
Shift lock system ....................................649
Shopping bag hooks........................... 503
Side airbags............................................. 108
Side marker lights
Switch........................................................178
Side mirror
Adjusting and folding ......................... 90
Mirror position memory ................... 70
Smart access system with
push-button start
Entry function ..........................................32
Starting the engine..............................152
Spare tire
Inflation pressure................................573
Storage location ................................ 639
Spark plug................................................ 672
Specifications .........................................666
Speedometer ...........................................167
Steering wheel
Adjustment...............................................87
Audio switches................................... 303
Heated steering wheel....................482
Steering wheel position
memory..................................................70
Storage feature......................................456
Stuck vehicle
If your vehicle becomes stuck.... 663
Sun visors ................................................. 472
Sunshades
Rear...........................................................493
Rear door.............................................. 496
Roof..............................................................96
Switch
“ECT” switch ..........................................157
Emergency flasher switch .............. 616
Engine switch........................................ 152
Fog light switch ......................................181
Hazard light switch ............................ 616
Heated steering wheel switch.....482
Ignition switch....................................... 152
Light switches ....................................... 178
Parking brake switch...........................161
Power door lock switch ....................48
Power trunk lid.......................................53
Power trunk opener and closer ....53
Power window switch ........................92
Window lock switch............................92
Wipers and washer switch ............ 182
711
Alphabetical index
T
712
Tachometer...............................................167
Tail lights
Switch ........................................................178
Theft deterrent system
Alarm ........................................................ 103
Engine immobilizer system ............. 101
Theft prevention labels ........................105
Tire inflation pressure .........................573
Tire information
Glossary................................................ 686
Size ...........................................................683
Tire identification number .............682
Uniform tire quality grading.........684
Tires
Chains .....................................................228
Checking ...............................................565
If you have a flat tire..........................639
Inflation pressure................................573
Inflation pressure sensor................566
Information............................................. 681
Replacing...............................................639
Rotating tires ........................................565
Size ...........................................................675
Snow tires..............................................228
Tire pressure warning
system..................................... 565, 629
Tools...........................................................639
Total load capacity ...............................226
Touch screen..........................................236
Towing
Dinghy towing .....................................233
Emergency towing............................. 617
Trailer towing .......................................232
TRAC ..........................................................213
Traction control.......................................213
Trip meter ..................................................167
Trunk
Extending a space ............................ 499
Opener ......................................................53
Closer .........................................................53
Trunk light
Wattage ..................................................677
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.......................603
Switch........................................................160
Wattage ..................................................677
V
Vanity lights
Vanity lights...........................................473
Wattage ..................................................677
Vanity mirrors ........................................ 473
Variable gear ratio steering...............213
VDIM...........................................................213
Vehicle dynamics integrated
management .........................................213
Vehicle identification number......... 667
Vehicle stability control .......................213
VGRS..........................................................213
VSC .............................................................213
Alphabetical index
W Warning buzzers
Brake system........................................627
Open door .......................................... 629
Seat belt reminder ............................ 629
Warning lights
Anti-lock brake system ..................628
Brake assist system ..........................628
Brake system........................... 627, 629
Charging system................................627
Electric power steering..................628
Electronic engine control
system..................................................628
Low fuel level....................................... 629
Low tire pressure .............................. 629
Malfunction indicator lamp ..........628
Master warning light........................ 629
Open door ........................................... 629
Pre-collision system.........................628
Pretensioners ......................................628
Seat belt reminder light .................. 629
SRS airbags..........................................628
Tire pressure........................................ 629
Warning messages.............................. 636
Washer
Checking...............................................564
Preparing and checking
before winter.................................... 228
Switch........................................................182
Washing and waxing .......................... 530
Weight
Cargo capacity ...................................223
Load limits..............................................226
Weight....................................................666
Wheels ...................................................... 577
Window glasses ...................................... 92
Window lock switch ............................... 92
Windows
Power windows.....................................92
Rear window defogger...................279
Washer .................................................... 182
Windshield wiper de-icer................. 280
Windshield wipers................................. 182
Wireless remote control key
Replacing the battery...................... 582
WMA disc ..........................294, 321, 377
713
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
P. 639 If you have a flat tire
P. 647 If the engine will not start
The engine does not start
P. 101
Engine immobilizer system
P. 657 If the battery is discharged
The shift lever cannot be
moved out
P. 649
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from “P”
The engine coolant temperature
gauge enters the red zone
P. 660 If your vehicle overheats
Steam can be seen coming
from under the hood
714
The key is lost
P. 652 If you lose your keys
The battery runs out
P. 657 If the battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked
P. 48
Doors
The horn begins to sound
P. 103
Alarm
The vehicle is stuck in mud or
sand
P. 663 If the vehicle becomes stuck
What to do if...
A warning light or indicator
light comes on
P. 627
If a warning light turns on or a warning
buzzer sounds...
■Warning lights
Brake system warning light
(red indicator)
or
Malfunction indicator lamp
or
P. 627
P. 628
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light
P. 629
“ABS” warning light
or
P. 628
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
P. 629
Brake system warning light
(yellow indicator)
P. 628
Master warning light with
warning message P. 629
Low fuel level warning light
P. 629
Electric power steering warning
light
P. 628
P. 628
Pre-collision system
warning light
P. 628
SRS warning light
Open door warning light
P. 629
Tire pressure warning light
P. 629
Charging system warning
light
P. 627
715
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever
P. 545
Hood lock release lever
P. 545
Fuel tank capacity
Fuel type
Cold tire inflation
pressure
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill)
Engine oil type
716
Trunk opener
P. 53
Fuel filler door opener
P. 98
22.1 gal. (84L, 18.4 Imp. gal.)
Unleaded gasoline only
Fuel filler door
P. 98
Tire inflation pressure
P. 675
P. 99, 669
P. 675
qt. (L, Imp. qt.)
With filter
2WD models
9.1 (8.6, 7.6)
AWD models
9.5 (9.0, 7.9)
Without filter
8.9 (8.4, 7.4)
Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended oil viscosity: SAE-5W-20, -0W-20
P. 670
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement